diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source')
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx | 3730 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.ins | 8 |
2 files changed, 2116 insertions, 1622 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx index bf3c4808c1b..36b003f6d6c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse %<*internal|bbx|cbx|dbx|lbx|doc> -\def\Version{2017/05/14 v0.10} +\def\Version{2017/11/18 v0.11} %</internal|bbx|cbx|dbx|lbx|doc> %<*internal> \iffalse @@ -16,6 +16,14 @@ \ProvidesFile{oxnotes.bbx} [\Version\space Footnote-based bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] %</bbx&n> +%<*bbx&m> +\ProvidesFile{oxnum.bbx} + [\Version\space Numeric bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] +%</bbx&m> +%<*bbx&a> +\ProvidesFile{oxalph.bbx} + [\Version\space Alphabetic bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] +%</bbx&a> %<*bbx&y> \ProvidesFile{oxyear.bbx} [\Version\space Author-year bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] @@ -24,12 +32,22 @@ \ProvidesFile{oxnotes.cbx} [\Version\space Footnote-based citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] %</cbx&n> +%<*cbx&m> +\ProvidesFile{oxnum.cbx} + [\Version\space Numeric citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] +%</cbx&m> +%<*cbx&a> +\ProvidesFile{oxalph.cbx} + [\Version\space Alphabetic citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] +%</cbx&a> %<*cbx&y> \ProvidesFile{oxyear.cbx} [\Version\space Author-year citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] %</cbx&y> %<*dbx> %<n>\ProvidesFile{oxnotes.dbx} +%<m>\ProvidesFile{oxnum.dbx} +%<a>\ProvidesFile{oxalph.dbx} %<y>\ProvidesFile{oxyear.dbx} [\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles] %</dbx> @@ -49,6 +67,14 @@ \ProvidesFile{oxnotes-doc.tex} [\Version\space Footnote-based biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] %</doc&n> +%<*doc&m> +\ProvidesFile{oxnum-doc.tex} + [\Version\space Numeric biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] +%</doc&m> +%<*doc&a> +\ProvidesFile{oxalph-doc.tex} + [\Version\space Alphabetic biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] +%</doc&a> %<*doc&y> \ProvidesFile{oxyear-doc.tex} [\Version\space Author-year biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style] @@ -56,16 +82,20 @@ %<*readme> # biblatex-oxref: Biblatex styles inspired by the *Oxford Guide to Style* -This bundle provides two [biblatex] styles that implement (some of) the +This bundle provides four [biblatex] styles that implement (some of) the stipulations and examples provided by the 2014 *New Hart's Rules* and the 2002 *Oxford Guide to Style*: * `oxnotes` is a style similar to the standard `verbose`, intended for use with footnotes; + * `oxnum` is a style similar to the standard `numeric`, + intended for use with numeric in-text citations. + * `oxalph` is a style similar to the standard `alphabetic`, + intended for use with alphabetic in-text citations. * `oxyear` is a style similar to the standard `authoryear`, intended for use with parenthetical in-text citations. -Both styles should be considered experimental. In particular, the ways in which +These styles should be considered experimental. In particular, the ways in which the styles handle certain tricky references are subject to change. [biblatex]: http://ctan.org/pkg/biblatex @@ -125,15 +155,23 @@ Copyright (C) 2016 Alex Ball \generate{ \file{\jobname.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,o}} \file{oxnotes.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,n}} + \file{oxnum.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,m}} + \file{oxalph.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,a}} \file{oxyear.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,y}} \file{oxnotes.cbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{cbx,n}} + \file{oxnum.cbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{cbx,m}} + \file{oxalph.cbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{cbx,a}} \file{oxyear.cbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{cbx,y}} \file{oxnotes.dbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{dbx,n}} + \file{oxnum.dbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{dbx,m}} + \file{oxalph.dbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{dbx,a}} \file{oxyear.dbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{dbx,y}} \file{american-\jobname.lbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{lbx,us}} \file{british-\jobname.lbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{lbx,gb}} \file{english-\jobname.lbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{lbx,en}} \file{oxnotes-doc.tex}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{doc,n}} + \file{oxnum-doc.tex}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{doc,m}} + \file{oxalph-doc.tex}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{doc,a}} \file{oxyear-doc.tex}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{doc,y}} } %</install> @@ -155,6 +193,8 @@ Copyright (C) 2016 Alex Ball \PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnotes}{biblatex} %</driver> %<doc&n>\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnotes,scnames,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex} +%<doc&m>\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnum,scnames,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex} +%<doc&a>\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxalph,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex} %<doc&y>\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxyear,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex} %<*driver|doc> \documentclass[extrafontsizes,11pt,a4paper,oneside]{memoir} @@ -288,12 +328,27 @@ Copyright (C) 2016 Alex Ball % \finentrypunct % }{}% % }{}{} +%<*doc&(m|a)> +% Shorthands useful for oxyear make overlong labels for oxnum/oxalph, +% so we remove them. +\DeclareSourcemap{% + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{% + \map[overwrite=true]{% + \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true] + }% + }% +} +%</doc&(m|a)> \hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto} \usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref} \crefname{page}{page}{pages} -\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#1}{\textsf{#1}}} +\NewDocumentCommand{\pkg}{om}{% + \IfNoValueTF{#1} + {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#2}}{\textsf{#2}}} + {\lowercase{\href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/#1-#2}}{\textsf{#2}}}% +} \newcommand*{\lit}[1]{\textsf{#1}} \newcommand*{\code}[1]{\texttt{#1}} \newcommand*{\aside}[1]{\textcolor{violet}{[\textsc{tip:} #1]}} @@ -530,6 +585,8 @@ Copyright (C) 2016 Alex Ball \title{OXREF -- Biblatex styles inspired by the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}} %</driver> %<doc&n>\title{OXNOTES -- A notes-based style for Biblatex} +%<doc&m>\title{OXNUM -- A numeric style for Biblatex} +%<doc&a>\title{OXALPH -- An alphabetic style for Biblatex} %<doc&y>\title{OXYEAR -- An author–year style for Biblatex} %<*driver|doc> \author{Alex Ball} @@ -564,13 +621,21 @@ Copyright (C) 2016 Alex Ball %<*driver> \chapter{Introduction} -This document provides the documented sources for the \textsf{oxref} +This document provides the documented sources for the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} biblography styles: \begin{itemize} - \item - \textsf{oxnotes}: a style similar to the standard \textsf{verbose}, intended for use with footnotes; - \item - \textsf{oxyear}: a style similar to the standard \textsf{authoryear}, intended for use with parenthetical in-text citations. +\item + \textsf{oxnotes}: a style similar to the standard \textsf{verbose}, + intended for use with footnotes; +\item + \textsf{oxnum}: a style similar to the standard \textsf{numeric}, + intended for use with numeric in-text citation labels; +\item + \textsf{oxalph}: a style similar to the standard \textsf{alphabetic}, + intended for use with alphabetic in-text citation labels; +\item + \textsf{oxyear}: a style similar to the standard \textsf{authoryear}, + intended for use with parenthetical in-text citations. \end{itemize} \section{Quick start} @@ -584,13 +649,28 @@ The styles are self-contained, so you can load them with \pkg{biblatex}: \addtocounter{FancyVerbLine}{-1}% \begin{tcblisting}{listing only} +\usepackage[style=oxnum]{biblatex} +\end{tcblisting} + +\addtocounter{FancyVerbLine}{-1}% +\begin{tcblisting}{listing only} +\usepackage[style=oxalph]{biblatex} +\end{tcblisting} + +\addtocounter{FancyVerbLine}{-1}% +\begin{tcblisting}{listing only} \usepackage[style=oxyear]{biblatex} \end{tcblisting} \end{multicols} For further information, including some additional options you can set, please refer to the separate documentation files -\href{./oxnotes-doc.pdf}{\texttt{oxnotes-doc.pdf}} and \href{./oxyear-doc.pdf}{\texttt{oxyear-doc.pdf}} respectively. +\href{./oxnotes-doc.pdf}{\texttt{oxnotes-doc.pdf}}, +\href{./oxnum-doc.pdf}{\texttt{oxnum-doc.pdf}}, +\href{./oxalph-doc.pdf}{\texttt{oxalph-doc.pdf}}, +and +\href{./oxyear-doc.pdf}{\texttt{oxyear-doc.pdf}} +respectively. \begin{markdown*}{hybrid=true} %</driver> @@ -604,6 +684,15 @@ To compile the documentation you will need to have the [minted] package working, which in turn relies on Python 2.6+ and Pygments. See the documentation of that package for details. +### Managed way + +The latest stable release of the biblatex-oxref bundle has been packaged for +TeX Live and MiKTeX. If you are running TeX Live and have `tlmgr` installed, you +can install the bundle simply by running `tlmgr install biblatex-oxref`. If you +are running MiKTeX, you can install the bundle by running +`mpm --install=biblatex-oxref`. Both `tlmgr` and `mpm` have GUI versions that +you might find friendlier. + ### Automated way A makefile is provided which you can use with the Make utility on @@ -611,16 +700,16 @@ UNIX-like systems: * Running `make source` generates the derived files - README.md - - oxref.bbx, oxnotes.bbx, oxyear.bbx - - oxnotes.cbx, oxyear.cbx + - oxref.bbx, oxnotes.bbx, oxyear.bbx, oxnum.bbx, oxalph.bbx + - oxnotes.cbx, oxyear.cbx, oxnum.cbx, oxalph.cbx - american-oxref.lbx, british-oxref.lbx, english-oxref.lbx - - oxnotes.dbx, oxyear.dbx + - oxnotes.dbx, oxyear.dbx, oxnum.dbx, oxalph.dbx - oxref.bib - oxref.ins - - oxnotes-doc.tex, oxyear-doc.tex + - oxnotes-doc.tex, oxyear-doc.tex, oxnum-doc.tex, oxalph-doc.tex * Running `make` generates the above files and also oxref.pdf, - oxnotes-doc.pdf, and oxyear-doc.pdf. + oxnotes-doc.pdf, oxyear-doc.pdf, oxnum-doc.pdf and oxalph-doc.pdf. * Running `make inst` installs the files in the user's TeX tree. You can undo this with `make uninst`. @@ -642,9 +731,9 @@ first two steps. 1. Run `luatex oxref.dtx` to generate the source files. (You can safely skip this step if you are confident about step 2.) - 2. Compile oxref.dtx, oxnotes-doc.tex and oxyear-doc.tex with LuaLaTeX and - Biber to generate the documentation. You will need to enable shell escape - so that [minted] can typeset the listings. + 2. Compile oxref.dtx, oxnotes-doc.tex, oxyear-doc.tex, and oxnum-doc.tex with + LuaLaTeX and Biber to generate the documentation. You will need to enable + shell escape so that [minted] can typeset the listings. 3. Move the files to your TeX tree as follows: - `source/latex/biblatex-oxref`: @@ -654,17 +743,27 @@ first two steps. american-oxref.lbx, british-oxref.lbx, english-oxref.lbx, + oxalph.bbx, + oxalph.cbx, + oxalph.dbx, oxnotes.bbx, oxnotes.cbx, oxnotes.dbx, + oxnum.bbx, + oxnum.cbx, + oxnum.dbx, oxref.bbx, oxyear.bbx, oxyear.cbx, oxyear.dbx - `doc/latex/biblatex-oxref`: README.md, + oxalph-doc.pdf, + oxalph-doc.tex, oxnotes-doc.pdf, oxnotes-doc.tex, + oxnum-doc.pdf, + oxnum-doc.tex, oxref.bib, oxref.pdf, oxyear-doc.pdf, @@ -699,7 +798,7 @@ This work is ‘maintained’ (as per LPPL maintenance status) by [Alex Ball][me \iffalse % syntax highlighting \fix %</driver> %<*doc|bib> -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \chapter{Introduction} \section{Loading the style}\label{sec:loading} @@ -707,6 +806,8 @@ This work is ‘maintained’ (as per LPPL maintenance status) by [Alex Ball][me The style is self-contained, so you can load it with \pkg{biblatex}: \begin{tcblisting}{listing only} %<n>\usepackage[style=oxnotes]{biblatex} +%<m>\usepackage[style=oxnum]{biblatex} +%<a>\usepackage[style=oxalph]{biblatex} %<y>\usepackage[style=oxyear]{biblatex} \end{tcblisting} @@ -725,10 +826,12 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones: \item\docValue{long} will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name %<y> in citations and the bibliography. +%<m|a> in the bibliography. %<n> in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations. \item\docValue{short} will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name %<y> in citations and the bibliography. +%<m|a> in the bibliography. %<n> in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations. \end{itemize} \end{docKey} @@ -764,22 +867,22 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones: separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’. \item\docValue{colon} separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’. -%<y> It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes} and not recommended for this style. +%<a|y> It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style. \item\docValue{comma} separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’. \item\docValue{parens} sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’. -%<n> It is intended for use with \textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style. +%<n|m> It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style. \end{itemize} \end{docKey} -%<*y> +%<*a|y> \begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}} Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position. - The standard option values are available but not well tested; I recommend you stick with the default of \val{year}. - If you do select \val{maximum} or \val{compact}, I recommend you also select \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{comp} to avoid loss of information. + The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}. + If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}. \end{docKey} -%</y> +%</a|y> \begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset} Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden. @@ -798,11 +901,11 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones: but the per-entry setting is always effective. \end{docKey} -%<*n> +%<*n|m> \begin{docKey}{scnames}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}} Prints initial author or editor names in bibliography entries in small capitals. \end{docKey} -%</n> +%</n|m> \begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}} Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it. @@ -810,8 +913,8 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones: \end{docKey} \begin{docKey}{usenametitles}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{true}} - Controls whether personal titles such as Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on are printed. - (There is an example of how to supply titles in the \hyperref[ex:lewis1981lww]{Lewis reference} on \cpageref{ex:lewis1981lww}.) + Controls whether titular prefixes such as Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on are printed. + (See \cref{sec:nametitles} for how to supply titles as part of a name.) This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis. \end{docKey} @@ -820,7 +923,7 @@ The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones: This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis. \end{docKey} -\textsf{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style. +\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style. It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work. In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected. @@ -884,12 +987,12 @@ Where a source is provided, it refers to a section from one of the reference wor \end{description} Where the source is starred (*), this indicates the example is not quite how it appears in the book, -usually because the original is demonstrating an option that is not the \textsf{oxref} default. -%<*y> +usually because the original is demonstrating an option that is not the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} default. +%<*a|y> Where the source is marked with a dagger (\textdagger), this indicates that the example has been coverted from an \textsf{oxnotes}-style one, since the guides provide relatively few for author-year references. -%</y> +%</a|y> \section{Design philosophy} @@ -898,7 +1001,7 @@ amount not so much to a consistent style as a body of advice for creating one. Unlike the style manuals published by the American Psychological Association, the Modern Language Association, and the University of Chicago to name but three, the emphasis of the Oxford guide is to describe good practice rather than prescribe a particular style. -This means that when it comes to \textsf{oxref}, there are decisions to be made +This means that when it comes to \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, there are decisions to be made as to which variations to support by default, which to support as options, and which to ignore quietly. @@ -911,13 +1014,14 @@ and have more of an eye on machine processing of bibliographies. They do, however, introduce additional variations with less of a steer on what is preferred, and are considerably shorter with fewer examples. -The approach of \textsf{oxref} is to follow the 2014 \emph{New Hart's Rules} as much as possible, +The approach of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to follow the 2014 \emph{New Hart's Rules} as much as possible, but where variations are given without strong preference, or where guidance is lacking, to follow the preferences of the 2002 guide. Where the practices of the humanities and the sciences are contrasted, -the former are followed for \textsf{oxnotes} and the latter for \textsf{oxyear}. +the former are followed for \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} +and the latter for \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear}. Where neither version gives explicit guidance on citing a resource supported by \textsf{biblatex}, -\textsf{oxref} extrapolates from what is provided, guided by standard \textsf{biblatex} +\pkg[biblatex]{oxref} extrapolates from what is provided, guided by standard \textsf{biblatex} and other major referencing styles. Where it is practical to do so, @@ -931,7 +1035,7 @@ see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}} \section{To do} -The \textsf{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion. +The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion. As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your @@ -959,26 +1063,30 @@ I would be most glad to hear from you: \end{itemize} \end{multicols} -It is not possible at the moment to use numeric or alphabetic citation styles -with \textsf{oxref}, but that might change in the future. - You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the \href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker} as well. - \chapter{Citations and common formatting}\label{sec:citing} %<*n> The \textsf{oxnotes} bibliography style is intended for use with a footnote or endnote citation style, -and indeed loads a generic \textsf{biblatex} one. +and indeed loads a standard \textsf{biblatex} one. While the note text generated by the style is very similar to that which appears in the bibliography, there is a difference in how author names are printed. %</n> +%<*m> +The \textsf{oxnum} bibliography style is intended for use with a numeric citation style, +and indeed loads a tweaked version of a standard \textsf{biblatex} one. +%</m> +%<*a> +The \textsf{oxalph} bibliography style is intended for use with an alphabetic citation style, +and indeed loads a tweaked version of a standard \textsf{biblatex} one. +%</a> %<*y> The \textsf{oxyear} bibliography style is intended for use with an author–year citation style, -and indeed loads a tweaked version of a generic \textsf{biblatex} one. +and indeed loads a tweaked version of a standard \textsf{biblatex} one. %</y> \section{Test citations} @@ -987,7 +1095,7 @@ and indeed loads a tweaked version of a generic \textsf{biblatex} one. Following the advice of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, \textsf{oxnotes} loads by default the standard \textsf{verbose} citation style, in which repeated citations are abbreviated to the author surname and a short title. %</n> -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> %<*bib> @book{faith1997epg, author = {R. J. Faith}, @@ -1007,7 +1115,7 @@ Following the advice of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, \textsf{oxnotes} loads by defau author = {Cobban}, title = {Colleges and halls}} %</bib> -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> %<*n> \begin{egcite}{} Test\footcite{faith1997epg} @@ -1028,6 +1136,15 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an al \end{tcblisting} %</n> +%<*m|a> +Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon. + +\begin{egcite}{} +Test \parencites% + [93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}% + [72]{hankinson1989gba} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently promotes an author–date citation scheme which uses parentheses, within which there is only a space between the name and date. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon. @@ -1048,7 +1165,7 @@ If different authors have the same surname, they are distiguished by their initi If there is no date, the replacement text is separated from the name by a comma. %</y> -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> %<*bib> @inbook{smithFCct, author = {P. Smith}, @@ -1060,7 +1177,7 @@ If there is no date, the replacement text is separated from the name by a comma. location = {London}, pubstate = {forthcoming}} %</bib> -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> %<*y> \nocite{smithFCct} \begin{egcite}{(P. Smith, forthcoming \emph{a}; T. Smith 1988)} @@ -1086,95 +1203,101 @@ Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have ‘Anonymous’ in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using ‘Anon.\@’ or a short title. %</y> -\tip{\textsf{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}. +\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}. %<n> Doing this will automatically suppress the printing of the anonymous author in notes. } %<*n> \begin{egcite}{} \cite{anon1822san}. -\cite{anon1956lu}. +\textcite{anon1956lu}. \end{egcite} %</n> \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {anon1822san} -%<n>\textsc{Anon.}, \emph{Stories after Nature} (London: Allman, 1822). -%<y>Anon.\@ (1822), \emph{Stories after Nature} (London: Allman). +%<n|m>\textsc{Anon.}, \emph{Stories after Nature} (London: Allman, 1822). +%<a|y>Anon.\@ (1822), \emph{Stories after Nature} (London: Allman). \toggletrue{blx@bibliography} \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{anon1822san, author = {Anonymous}, title = {Stories after Nature}, location = {London}, publisher = {Allman}, date = {1822}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {anon1956lu} -%<n>\textsc{Anon.}, \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée, 1956). -%<y>Anon.\@ (1956), \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée). +%<n|m>\textsc{Anon.}, \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée, 1956). +%<a|y>Anon.\@ (1956), \emph{Liber usualis} (Tournai: Desclée). \toggletrue{blx@bibliography} \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{anon1956lu, author = {Anonymous}, title = {Liber usualis}, location = {Tournai}, publisher = {Desclée}, year = {1956}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} +%<*m|a> +\begin{egcite}{} +\textcite{anon1822san,anon1956lu} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> -\begin{egcite}{(Anon.\@ 1822; 1956)} -\parencite{anon1822san,anon1956lu} +\begin{egcite}{(Anon.\@ 1822; 1956), Anon.\@ (1956)} +\parencite{anon1822san,anon1956lu}, +\textcite{anon1956lu} \end{egcite} - %</y> +%<!n> \subsection{Pseudepigraphy} Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is %<n>to add the prefix ‘Pseudo-’ before the name in notes, and to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography. -\tip{With \textsf{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}. +\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}. %<n>Since this mechanism is aimed at ancient texts, it has only been designed to work with single-part names %<n>(i.e. either a single word, or a whole name wrapped in braces). } -%<*n> +%<*n|m|a> \begin{egcite}{} -\cite{boethius1976dds} +\textcite{boethius1976dds} \end{egcite} - -%</n> +%</n|m|a> %<*y> \begin{egcite}{} \parencite{boethius1976dds} \end{egcite} - %</y> + \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {boethius1976dds} -%<n>\textsc{Boethius (Ps.-)}, \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. Olga Weijers (Leiden, 1976).\toggletrue{blx@bibliography} -%<y>Boethius (Ps.-) (1976), \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. O.\ Weijers (Leiden). +%<n|m>\textsc{Boethius (Ps.-)}, \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. Olga Weijers (Leiden, 1976). +%<a|y>Boethius (Ps.-) (1976), \emph{De disciplina scolarium: Édition critique, introduction et notes}, ed. O.\ Weijers (Leiden). +\toggletrue{blx@bibliography} \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{boethius1976dds, author = {Boethius}, author+an = {1=pseudo}, @@ -1183,7 +1306,7 @@ to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography. editor = {Olga Weijers}, location = {Leiden}, date = {1976}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1193,33 +1316,33 @@ to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography. If the attribution is missing from the work but may be inferred from other sources, Oxford style is to give the attribution in square brackets. -\tip{With \textsf{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the whole name field +\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the whole name field (usually \code{author} or \code{editor}) with the keyword \code{inferred}. You can also annotate names individually within the list, if only some of them should be taken as inferred.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {balfour1768pe} -%<n>{[James Balfour]}, \emph{Philosophical Essays} (Edinburgh, 1768). -%<y>{[Balfour, J.]} (1768), \emph{Philosophical Essays} (Edinburgh). +%<n|m>{[James Balfour]}, \emph{Philosophical Essays} (Edinburgh, 1768). +%<a|y>{[Balfour, J.]} (1768), \emph{Philosophical Essays} (Edinburgh). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{balfour1768pe, author = {James Balfour}, author+an = {=inferred}, title = {Philosophical Essays}, location = {Edinburgh}, date = {1768}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}. If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}. The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}. - Note, however, that \textsf{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.} + Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.} \subsection{Pseudonyms} @@ -1231,21 +1354,21 @@ in parentheses (\emph{Oxford Guide to Style}) or brackets (\emph{New Hart's Rule the canonical place to include it is the \code{nameaddon} field.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.2> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.2> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.2\textdagger> {dodgson1896sl} -%<n>C. L. Dodgson [Lewis Carroll], \emph{Symbolic Logic} (Oxford, 1896). -%<y>Dodgson, C. L. [Lewis Carroll] (1896), \emph{Symbolic Logic} (Oxford). +%<n|m>C. L. Dodgson [Lewis Carroll], \emph{Symbolic Logic} (Oxford, 1896). +%<a|y>Dodgson, C. L. [Lewis Carroll] (1896), \emph{Symbolic Logic} (Oxford). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{dodgson1896sl, author = {C. L. Dodgson}, nameaddon = {Lewis Carroll}, title = {Symbolic Logic}, location = {Oxford}, date = {1896}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1261,21 +1384,21 @@ in parentheses (\emph{Oxford Guide to Style}) or brackets (\emph{New Hart's Rule \code{nameaddon} field format, but only if it is different.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.2> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.2> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.2\textdagger> {lauder1965lss} -%<n>Afferbeck Lauder [Alistair Morrison], \emph{Let Stalk Strine} (Sydney, 1965). -%<y>Lauder, A. [Morrison, A.] (1965), \emph{Let Stalk Strine} (Sydney). +%<n|m>Afferbeck Lauder [Alistair Morrison], \emph{Let Stalk Strine} (Sydney, 1965). +%<a|y>Lauder, A. [Morrison, A.] (1965), \emph{Let Stalk Strine} (Sydney). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{lauder1965lss, author = {Afferbeck Lauder}, authoraddon = {Alistair Morrison}, title = {Let Stalk Strine}, location = {Sydney}, date = {1965}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1295,6 +1418,11 @@ In cases where an author changes the name under which they publish (e.g.\ due to \cite{joukovsky1967gdd} \end{egcite*} %</n> +%<*m|a> +\begin{egcite}{} +\textcite{joukovsky1967gdd} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> \begin{egcite}{} \parencite{joukovsky1967gdd} @@ -1302,14 +1430,15 @@ In cases where an author changes the name under which they publish (e.g.\ due to %</y> \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.17.4> -%<y><OGS \S15.17.4\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.17.4> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.17.4\textdagger> {joukovsky1967gdd} -%<n>\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}\textsc{Joukovsky, F.} (= \textsc{Joukovsky-Micha, F.}), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29 (1967), 55–92. -%<y>\toggletrue{blx@bibliography}Joukovsky, F. (= Joukovsky-Micha, F.) (1967), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29: 55–92. +%<n|m>\textsc{Joukovsky, F.} (= \textsc{Joukovsky-Micha, F.}), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29 (1967), 55–92. +%<a|y>Joukovsky, F. (= Joukovsky-Micha, F.) (1967), \enquote{La Guerre des dieux et des géants chez les poètes francais du XVI\textsuperscript{e} siècle (1500–1585)}, \emph{Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance}, 29: 55–92. +\toggletrue{blx@bibliography} \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{joukovsky1967gdd, author = {F. Joukovsky}, authoraddon = {F. Joukovsky-Micha}, @@ -1321,7 +1450,7 @@ In cases where an author changes the name under which they publish (e.g.\ due to date = {1967}, langid = {french}, pages = {55-92}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1335,6 +1464,11 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi \cite{kuehner.blass1890ef} \end{egcite*} %</n> +%<*m|a> +\begin{egcite}{} +\textcite{kuehner.blass1890ef} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> \begin{egcite}{} \parencite{kuehner.blass1890ef} @@ -1343,11 +1477,12 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi \begin{bibexbox} {kuehner.blass1890ef} -%<n>\textsc{Kühner, Raphael}, rev. \textsc{Blass, Friedrich}, \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung, 1890-2).\toggletrue{blx@bibliography} -%<y>Kühner, R., rev. Blass, F. (1890-2), \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung). +%<n|m>\textsc{Kühner, Raphael}, rev. \textsc{Blass, Friedrich}, \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung, 1890-2). +%<a|y>Kühner, R., rev. Blass, F. (1890-2), \emph{Ausführliche grammatik der griechischen sprache}, i: \emph{Elementar- und Formenlehre} (Hannover: Hahnsche Buchhandlung). +\toggletrue{blx@bibliography} \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvbook{kuehner.blass1890ef, author = {Raphael Kühner}, editor = {Friedrich Blass}, @@ -1360,12 +1495,39 @@ If the contribution of the translators or revisers is so great they could be joi location = {Hannover}, publisher = {Hahnsche Buchhandlung}, date = {1890/1892}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \textsf{oxref} does not calculate it for you.} +\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.} +\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles} + +Generally speaking, using titular prefixes like Revd, Dr, Mrs, Sir, and so on as part of an author's name is unnecessary, +but there are occasions when removing them can cause problems, so with \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} you can supply them if you need to. +I have not added special rules for recognizing such titles, so if you want to include one you have to label each part of the name explicitly, as in the following example (the keyword for the titular prefix is \code{title}). + +\begin{bibexbox} +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.2*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.2*\textdagger> +{wood1861el} +%<n|m>Mrs Henry Wood, \emph{East Lynne}, 3 vols. (London, 1861). +%<a|y>Wood, Mrs H. (1861), \emph{East Lynne}, 3 vols. (London). +\tcblower +\begin{Verbatim} +%</n|m|a|y> +@mvbook{wood1861el, + author = {title=Mrs, given=Henry, family=Wood}, + title = {East Lynne}, + volumes = {3}, + location = {London}, + date = {1861}} +%<*n|m|a|y> +\end{Verbatim} +\end{bibexbox} + +You can switch the display of titular prefixes on or off using the \key{usenametitles} option. +This can be set globally or on a per-type or per-entry basis. \section{Works in foreign languages} @@ -1374,14 +1536,14 @@ If you used a foreign language work, you might want to recommend a good translat \tip{Add the translation in \code{related}, and set \code{relatedtype} to \code{translationas}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.5*> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.5*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.5*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.5*\textdagger> {tschichold1955tg} -%<n>J. Tschichold, \emph{Typographische Gestaltung} (Basle, 1955); Eng. trans. as \emph{Asymmetric Typography} (London, 1967). -%<y>Tschichold, J. (1955), \emph{Typographische Gestaltung} (Basle); Eng. trans. as \emph{Asymmetric Typography} (London, 1967). +%<n|m>J. Tschichold, \emph{Typographische Gestaltung} (Basle, 1955); Eng. trans. as \emph{Asymmetric Typography} (London, 1967). +%<a|y>Tschichold, J. (1955), \emph{Typographische Gestaltung} (Basle); Eng. trans. as \emph{Asymmetric Typography} (London, 1967). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{tschichold1955tg, author = {J. Tschichold}, title = {Typographische Gestaltung}, @@ -1393,21 +1555,21 @@ If you used a foreign language work, you might want to recommend a good translat title = {Asymmetric Typography}, location = {London}, date = {1967}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \tip{To specify the translator up front, set the \code{relatedtype} to \code{bytranslator} instead.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.14> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.14> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger> {sarrau1975ta} -%<n>José Sarrau, \emph{Tapas y aperitivos} (Madrid, 1975); trans. Francesca Piemonte Slesinger as \emph{Tapas and Appetizers} (New York, 1987). -%<y>Sarrau, J. (1975), \emph{Tapas y aperitivos} (Madrid); trans. F. P. Slesinger as \emph{Tapas and Appetizers} (New York, 1987). +%<n|m>José Sarrau, \emph{Tapas y aperitivos} (Madrid, 1975); trans. Francesca Piemonte Slesinger as \emph{Tapas and Appetizers} (New York, 1987). +%<a|y>Sarrau, J. (1975), \emph{Tapas y aperitivos} (Madrid); trans. F. P. Slesinger as \emph{Tapas and Appetizers} (New York, 1987). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{sarrau1975ta, author = {José Sarrau}, title = {Tapas y aperitivos}, @@ -1421,7 +1583,7 @@ If you used a foreign language work, you might want to recommend a good translat title = {Tapas and Appetizers}, location = {New York}, date = {1987}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1431,14 +1593,14 @@ If you used the translation, you might want to give the original publication as \tip{Add the original in \code{related}, and set \code{relatedtype} to \code{translationof}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.5\textdagger> {metz1938hyb} -%<n>R. Metz, \emph{A Hundred Years of British Philosophy}, ed. J. H. Muirhead, trans. J. W. Harvey (1938) [Ger. orig., \emph{Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien} (1935)] -%<y>Metz, R. (1938), \emph{A Hundred Years of British Philosophy}, ed. J. H. Muirhead, trans. J. W. Harvey [Ger. orig., \emph{Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien} (1935)] +%<n|m>R. Metz, \emph{A Hundred Years of British Philosophy}, ed. J. H. Muirhead, trans. J. W. Harvey (1938) [Ger. orig., \emph{Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien} (1935)] +%<a|y>Metz, R. (1938), \emph{A Hundred Years of British Philosophy}, ed. J. H. Muirhead, trans. J. W. Harvey [Ger. orig., \emph{Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien} (1935)] \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{metz1938hyb, author = {R. Metz}, title = {A Hundred Years of British Philosophy}, @@ -1451,7 +1613,7 @@ If you used the translation, you might want to give the original publication as title = {Die philosophischen Strömungen der Gegenwart in Grossbritannien}, date = {1935}, language = {german}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1460,20 +1622,20 @@ It is often helpful to provide an informative translation of foreign language ti \tip{Put the translation in \code{titleaddon}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.5\textdagger> {nissan1965hnm} -%<n>Nissan Motor Corporation, \emph{Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi} [A 30-year history of Nissan Motors] (1965). -%<y>Nissan Motor Corporation (1965), \emph{Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi} [A 30-year history of Nissan Motors]. +%<n|m>Nissan Motor Corporation, \emph{Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi} [A 30-year history of Nissan Motors] (1965). +%<a|y>Nissan Motor Corporation (1965), \emph{Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi} [A 30-year history of Nissan Motors]. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{nissan1965hnm, author = {{Nissan Motor Corporation}}, title = {Nissan Jidosha 30nen shi}, titleaddon = {A 30-year history of Nissan Motors}, date = {1965}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1481,14 +1643,14 @@ It is often helpful to provide an informative translation of foreign language ti Conversely, it might be helpful to provide the English original of a translated title. \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {milne1938pb} -%<n>A. A. Milne, \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam: Williams, 1938). -%<y>Milne, A. A. (1938), \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam: Williams). +%<n|m>A. A. Milne, \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam: Williams, 1938). +%<a|y>Milne, A. A. (1938), \emph{Pu der Bär} [Ger. trans. of \emph{Winnie the Pooh}] (Potsdam: Williams). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{milne1938pb, author = {A. A. Milne}, title = {Pu der Bär}, @@ -1497,7 +1659,7 @@ Conversely, it might be helpful to provide the English original of a translated location = {Potsdam}, publisher = {Williams}, date = {1938}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1505,27 +1667,27 @@ Conversely, it might be helpful to provide the English original of a translated For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}). -\tip{To have \textsf{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.} +\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.} -\tip{To have \textsf{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead. +\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead. This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.9> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.9\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.9> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.9\textdagger> {padua1961p} -%<n>Marchetto of Padua, \emph{Pomerium}, ed. Guiseppe Vecchi (n.p., 1961). -%<y>Marchetto of Padua (1961), \emph{Pomerium}, ed. G. Vecchi (n.p.). +%<n|m>Marchetto of Padua, \emph{Pomerium}, ed. Guiseppe Vecchi (n.p., 1961). +%<a|y>Marchetto of Padua (1961), \emph{Pomerium}, ed. G. Vecchi (n.p.). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{padua1961p, author = {{Marchetto of Padua}}, title = {Pomerium}, editor = {Guiseppe Vecchi}, date = {1961}, options = {nolocation}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1538,18 +1700,18 @@ For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details. -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1> {goldblatt1973dmm} Robert Goldblatt, \enquote{Diodorean Modality in Minkowski Space-Time}, \emph{Studia Logica}, 39/3 (1973), 219--36. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @article{goldblatt1973dmm, author = {Robert Goldblatt}, title = {Diodorean Modality in Minkowski Space-Time}, @@ -1558,20 +1720,20 @@ Robert Goldblatt, \enquote{Diodorean Modality in Minkowski Space-Time}, \emph{St number = {3}, date = {1973}, pages = {219-236}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {hollingsworth1957dsb} Hollingsworth, T. H. (1957), \enquote{A Demographic Study of the British Ducal Families}, \emph{Population Studies}, 11/1: 4–26. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @article{hollingsworth1957dsb, author = {T. H. Hollingsworth}, date = {1957}, @@ -1580,21 +1742,21 @@ Hollingsworth, T. H. (1957), \enquote{A Demographic Study of the British Ducal F volume = {11}, number = {1}, pages = {4-26}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m> % Internal quotes, subtitle, no number \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1> {inalcik1992csm} Halil Inalcik, \enquote{Comments on \enquote{Sultanism}: Max Weber's Typification of the Ottoman Polity}, \emph{Princeton Papers in Near Eastern Studies}, 1 (1992), 49--72. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @article{inalcik1992csm, author = {Halil Inalcik}, title = {Comments on \enquote{Sultanism}}, @@ -1603,21 +1765,21 @@ Halil Inalcik, \enquote{Comments on \enquote{Sultanism}: Max Weber's Typificatio volume = {1}, date = {1992}, pages = {49-72}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> % Subtitle \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S17.3.2*> {unwin1994sce} Unwin, T. (1994), \enquote{Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture: From Command Economy to Privatisation}, \emph{Geography}, 79/3: 246–61. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @article{unwin1994sce, author = {Tim Unwin}, date = {1994}, @@ -1627,23 +1789,23 @@ Unwin, T. (1994), \enquote{Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture: From Comma volume = {79}, number = {3}, pages = {246-261}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> % Many authors, 'von' part, no number \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {vaucouleurs1975nmn} -%<n>Gerald de Vaucouleurs et al., \enquote{The New Martian Nomenclature of the International Astronomical Union}, \emph{Icarus}, 26 (1975), 85--98. -%<y>Vaucouleurs, G. de, et al. (1975), \enquote{The New Martian Nomenclature of the International Astronomical Union}, \emph{Icarus}, 26: 85--98. +%<n|m>Gerald de Vaucouleurs et al., \enquote{The New Martian Nomenclature of the International Astronomical Union}, \emph{Icarus}, 26 (1975), 85--98. +%<a|y>Vaucouleurs, G. de, et al. (1975), \enquote{The New Martian Nomenclature of the International Astronomical Union}, \emph{Icarus}, 26: 85--98. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{vaucouleurs1975nmn, author = {Gerald de Vaucouleurs and J. Blunck and M. Davies and A. Dollfus and I. Koval and G. Kuiper and H. Masursky and S. Miyamoto and V Moroz and Carl Sagan}, @@ -1652,20 +1814,20 @@ Unwin, T. (1994), \enquote{Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture: From Comma volume = {26}, date = {1975}, pages = {85-98}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} % DOI \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {druin2002rcd} -%<n>A. Druin, \enquote{The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}, \emph{Behaviour \& Information Technology}, 21/1 (2002), 1–25. doi: \path{10.1080/01449290110108659} -%<y>Druin, A. (2002), \enquote{The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}, \emph{Behaviour \& Information Technology}, 21/1: 1–25. doi: \path{10.1080/01449290110108659} +%<n|m>A. Druin, \enquote{The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}, \emph{Behaviour \& Information Technology}, 21/1 (2002), 1–25. doi: \path{10.1080/01449290110108659} +%<a|y>Druin, A. (2002), \enquote{The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}, \emph{Behaviour \& Information Technology}, 21/1: 1–25. doi: \path{10.1080/01449290110108659} \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{druin2002rcd, author = {A. Druin}, title = {The Role of Children in the Design of New Technology}, @@ -1675,7 +1837,7 @@ Unwin, T. (1994), \enquote{Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture: From Comma date = {2002}, pages = {1-25}, doi = {10.1080/01449290110108659}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1688,7 +1850,7 @@ Unwin, T. (1994), \enquote{Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture: From Comma %<y>Li, S. et al. (2013), \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11, e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188} \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{li.etal2013flh, author = {Shu Li and Chungkun Shih and Chen Wang and Hong Pang and Dong Ren}, title = {Forever Love}, @@ -1699,21 +1861,21 @@ Unwin, T. (1994), \enquote{Structural Change in Estonian Agriculture: From Comma date = {2013}, eid = {e78188}, doi = {10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -\hack{If the last\slash only word of the journal title is abbreviated (indicated by point or capital letter), it does not need a comma after it. \textsf{Oxref} will try to detect this; if it gets it wrong, you can suppress the comma by adding \cs{nopunct} to the end of the journal (sub)title, or restore it by adding a pair of braces.} +\hack{If the last\slash only word of the journal title is abbreviated (indicated by point or capital letter), it does not need a comma after it. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will try to detect this; if it gets it wrong, you can suppress the comma by adding \cs{nopunct} to the end of the journal (sub)title, or restore it by adding a pair of braces.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1> {lindars1965eir} B. Lindars, \enquote{Ezechiel and Individual Responsibility}, \emph{VT} 15 (1965), 452--67. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @article{lindars1965eir, author = {B. Lindars}, title = {Ezechiel and Individual Responsibility}, @@ -1721,23 +1883,23 @@ B. Lindars, \enquote{Ezechiel and Individual Responsibility}, \emph{VT} 15 (1965 volume = {15}, date = {1965}, pages = {452-467}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*n|y> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|a|y> % Unsigned, with month as issue name \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.4.1*> -%<y><OGS \S15.4.1*\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.4.1*> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.4.1*\textdagger> {jsr1990spt} -%<n>\enquote{Solar Photon Thruster}, \emph{Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets}, 28/4 (July–Aug. 1990), 411–6. -%<y>\enquote{Solar Photon Thruster} (1990), \emph{Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets}, 28/4 (July–Aug.): 411–6. +%<n|m>\enquote{Solar Photon Thruster}, \emph{Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets}, 28/4 (July–Aug. 1990), 411–6. +%<a|y>\enquote{Solar Photon Thruster} (1990), \emph{Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets}, 28/4 (July–Aug.): 411–6. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{jsr1990spt, title = {Solar Photon Thruster}, journaltitle = {Journal of Spacecraft and Rockets}, @@ -1745,25 +1907,25 @@ B. Lindars, \enquote{Ezechiel and Individual Responsibility}, \emph{VT} 15 (1965 number = {4}, date = {1990-07/1990-08}, pages = {411-416}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \section{Articles in periodicals with series} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, nth \lit{ser}., Vol/Number (Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, nth \lit{ser}., Vol/Number: Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, nth \lit{ser}., Vol/Number (Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, nth \lit{ser}., Vol/Number: Pages.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.3.3> -%<y><NHR \S18.3.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.3.3> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.3.3\textdagger> {moody1953mdb} -%<n>T. W. Moody, \enquote{Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906}, \emph{Transactions of the Royal Historical Society}, 5th ser., 3 (1953), 53--76. -%<y>Moody, T. W. (1953), \enquote{Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906}, \emph{Transactions of the Royal Historical Society}, 5th ser., 3: 53--76. +%<n|m>T. W. Moody, \enquote{Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906}, \emph{Transactions of the Royal Historical Society}, 5th ser., 3 (1953), 53--76. +%<a|y>Moody, T. W. (1953), \enquote{Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906}, \emph{Transactions of the Royal Historical Society}, 5th ser., 3: 53--76. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{moody1953mdb, author = {T. W. Moody}, title = {Michael Davitt and the British Labour Movement, 1882–1906}, @@ -1772,22 +1934,22 @@ B. Lindars, \enquote{Ezechiel and Individual Responsibility}, \emph{VT} 15 (1965 volume = {3}, date = {1953}, pages = {53-76}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, \textsc{ns} Vol/Number (Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, \textsc{ns} Vol/Number, Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, \textsc{ns} Vol/Number (Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, \textsc{ns} Vol/Number, Pages.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.3> {barnes1971has} J. Barnes, \enquote{Homonymy in Aristotle and Speusippus}, \emph{Classical Quarterly}, \textsc{ns} 21 (1971), 65--80. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @article{barnes1971has, author = {J. Barnes}, title = {Homonymy in Aristotle and Speusippus}, @@ -1796,20 +1958,20 @@ J. Barnes, \enquote{Homonymy in Aristotle and Speusippus}, \emph{Classical Quart volume = {21}, date = {1971}, pages = {65--80}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2*> {hankinson1989gba} Hankinson, R. J. (1989), \enquote{Galen and the Best of All Possible Worlds}, \emph{CQ}, \textsc{ns} 39: 43–76. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @article{hankinson1989gba, author = {R. J. Hankinson}, date = {1989}, @@ -1818,36 +1980,36 @@ Hankinson, R. J. (1989), \enquote{Galen and the Best of All Possible Worlds}, \e series = {newseries}, volume = {39}, pages = {43–76}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \section{Articles in issues identified by date alone} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Day Month Year, Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Day Month: Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Day Month Year, Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Day Month: Pages.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> % No author \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.4.1> {bw1984wen} \enquote{Who's Excellent Now?}, \emph{Business Week}, 5 Nov. 1984, 76--86. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @article{bw1984wen, title = {Who's Excellent Now?}, journaltitle = {Business Week}, date = {1984-11-05}, pages = {76-86}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1857,35 +2019,35 @@ Hankinson, R. J. (1989), \enquote{Galen and the Best of All Possible Worlds}, \e Alan Lee, \enquote{England Haunted by Familiar Failings}, \emph{The Times}, 23 June 1995. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @article{lee1995ehf, author = {Alan Lee}, title = {England Haunted by Familiar Failings}, journaltitle = {The Times}, date = {1995-06-23}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2*> {marx1842kaa} Marx, K. (1842), \enquote{Der Kommunismus und die Augsburger \enquote{Allgemeine Zeitung}}, \emph{Rheinische Zeitung}, 16 Oct.: 1–2. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @article{marx1842kaa, author = {Karl Marx}, title = {Der Kommunismus und die Augsburger \enquote{Allgemeine Zeitung}}, journaltitle = {Rheinische Zeitung}, date = {1842-10-16}, pages = {1-2}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1898,8 +2060,8 @@ Marx, K. (1842), \enquote{Der Kommunismus und die Augsburger \enquote{Allgemeine WHO (World Health Organization) (1983), \enquote{Nutrition: Sex Bias of Nutritional Status of Children 0–4 Years}, \emph{Weekly Epidemiologial Record}, 20 May. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @article{who1983nsb, shortauthor = {WHO}, author = {{World Health Organization}}, @@ -1907,31 +2069,31 @@ WHO (World Health Organization) (1983), \enquote{Nutrition: Sex Bias of Nutritio title = {Nutrition}, subtitle = {Sex Bias of Nutritional Status of Children 0–4 Years}, journaltitle = {Weekly Epidemiologial Record}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> % Year as volume number \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.3> -%<y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.3> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> {boyce1957pgi} -%<n>M. Boyce, \enquote{The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition}, \emph{Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society}, 1957, 10--45. -%<y>Boyce, M. (1957), \enquote{The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition}, \emph{Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society}: 10--45. +%<n|m>M. Boyce, \enquote{The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition}, \emph{Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society}, 1957, 10--45. +%<a|y>Boyce, M. (1957), \enquote{The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition}, \emph{Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society}: 10--45. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{boyce1957pgi, author = {M. Boyce}, title = {The Parthian \emph{Gsn} and Iranian Minstrel Tradition}, journaltitle = {Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society}, date = {1957}, pages = {10-45}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -1942,20 +2104,20 @@ issue of a periodical, and show how you may reference both at once. You can either add the periodical details to a book entry or add the book details to a periodical entry. -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Location: Publisher, Year), pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Location: Publisher), pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Location: Publisher, Year), pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Location: Publisher), pages.} \tip{Use \code{equals} as the \code{relatedtype}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.4.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.4.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger> {bec1976isc} -%<n>C. Bec (ed.), \emph{Italie 1500--1550: Une situation de crise?} = \emph{Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin}, 1975/2 (Langues étrangères, 2; Lyon, 1976), 99--109. -%<y>Bec, C. (1976) (ed.), \emph{Italie 1500--1550: Une situation de crise?} = \emph{Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin}, 1975/2 (Langues étrangères, 2; Lyon), 99--109. +%<n|m>C. Bec (ed.), \emph{Italie 1500--1550: Une situation de crise?} = \emph{Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin}, 1975/2 (Langues étrangères, 2; Lyon, 1976), 99--109. +%<a|y>Bec, C. (1976) (ed.), \emph{Italie 1500--1550: Une situation de crise?} = \emph{Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin}, 1975/2 (Langues étrangères, 2; Lyon), 99--109. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @collection{bec1976isc, editor = {C. Bec}, title = {Italie 1500--1550}, @@ -1971,31 +2133,31 @@ or add the book details to a periodical entry. title = {Annales de l'Université Jean Moulin}, volume = {1975}, number = {2}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} = \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number.} \tip{Use \code{issuetitle} instead of \code{title} to get the right formatting.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.4.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.4.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger> {trisoglio1973gnq} -%<n>F. Trisoglio, \emph{Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)} = \emph{Rivista Iasalliana}, 40 (1973). -%<y>Trisoglio, F. (1973), \emph{Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)} = \emph{Rivista Iasalliana}, 40. +%<n|m>F. Trisoglio, \emph{Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)} = \emph{Rivista Iasalliana}, 40 (1973). +%<a|y>Trisoglio, F. (1973), \emph{Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)} = \emph{Rivista Iasalliana}, 40. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{trisoglio1973gnq, author = {F. Trisoglio}, issuetitle = {Gregorio di Nazianzo in un quarentennio di recherche (1925--1965)}, journaltitle = {Rivista Iasalliana}, volume = {40}, date = {1973}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2004,20 +2166,20 @@ or add the book details to a periodical entry. \DeclareNumChars*{S} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year); \lit{Supplement to} \emph{MainJournalTitle} Vol/Number, Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number; \lit{Supplement to} \emph{MainJournalTitle} Vol/Number: Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year); \lit{Supplement to} \emph{MainJournalTitle} Vol/Number, Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number; \lit{Supplement to} \emph{MainJournalTitle} Vol/Number: Pages.} \tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the parent issue, reference it in the \code{related} field, and use the key \code{suppto} as the \code{relatedtype}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.4.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.4.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.4.1\textdagger> {zhentao.etal1989ars} -%<n>X. Zhentao, K. K. C. Yau, and F. R. Stephenson, \enquote{Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones}, \emph{Archaeoastronomy}, 14 (1989); Supplement to \emph{Journal for the History of Astronomy}, 20, pp. S61--S72. -%<y>Zhentao, X., Yau, K. K. C., and Stephenson, F. R. (1989) \enquote{Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones}, \emph{Archaeoastronomy}, 14; Supplement to \emph{Journal for the History of Astronomy}, 20, pp. S61--S72. +%<n|m>X. Zhentao, K. K. C. Yau, and F. R. Stephenson, \enquote{Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones}, \emph{Archaeoastronomy}, 14 (1989); Supplement to \emph{Journal for the History of Astronomy}, 20, pp. S61--S72. +%<a|y>Zhentao, X., Yau, K. K. C., and Stephenson, F. R. (1989) \enquote{Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones}, \emph{Archaeoastronomy}, 14; Supplement to \emph{Journal for the History of Astronomy}, 20, pp. S61--S72. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{zhentao.etal1989ars, author = {X. Zhentao and K. K. C. Yau and F. R. Stephenson}, title = {Astronomical Records on the Shang Dynasty Oracle Bones}, @@ -2031,7 +2193,7 @@ or add the book details to a periodical entry. @periodical{jha1989, title = {Journal for the History of Astronomy}, volume = {20}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2042,15 +2204,15 @@ or add the book details to a periodical entry. \tip{Use the key \code{serialarticle} as the \code{relatedtype}.} -%</n|y> -%<*y> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S 17.3*> {stookey1974ssp} Stookey, R. W. (1974), \enquote{Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab Republic}, \emph{Middle East Journal}, 28/3: 248–60; 28/4: 409–19. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @article{stookey1974ssp, author = {R. W. Stookey}, date = {1974}, @@ -2067,51 +2229,51 @@ Stookey, R. W. (1974), \enquote{Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab volume = {28}, number = {4}, pages = {409-419}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> +%</a|y> -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \section{Accepted journal articles, pre-publication} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{to be published in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Year.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{to be published in} \emph{JournalTitle}.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{to be published in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Year.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{to be published in} \emph{JournalTitle}.} \begin{bibexbox} {briscoe2008esp} (not in book) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{briscoe2008esp, author = {Robert Briscoe}, title = {Egocentric Spatial Representation in Action and Perception}, journaltitle = {Philosophy and Phenomenological Research}, url = {http://cogprints.org/5780/1/ECSRAP.F07.pdf}, pubstate = {inpress}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \section{Reviews} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.} \tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.4.4> -%<y><OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.4.4> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger> {dean1995rpb} -%<n>J. Dean, review of Philippe Basiron, \emph{My Early Life} (Bourges, 1994), in \emph{Res facta}, 17 (1995), 56--9. -%<y>Dean, J. (1995), review of P. Basiron (1994), \emph{My Early Life} (Bourges), in \emph{Res facta}, 17: 56--9. +%<n|m>J. Dean, review of Philippe Basiron, \emph{My Early Life} (Bourges, 1994), in \emph{Res facta}, 17 (1995), 56--9. +%<a|y>Dean, J. (1995), review of P. Basiron (1994), \emph{My Early Life} (Bourges), in \emph{Res facta}, 17: 56--9. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @review{dean1995rpb, author = {J. Dean}, related = {basiron1994mel}, @@ -2125,19 +2287,19 @@ Stookey, R. W. (1974), \enquote{Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab title = {My Early Life}, location = {Bourges}, date = {1994}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.4.4> -%<y><OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.4.4> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger> {jocelyn1989pav} -%<n>H. D. Jocelyn, \enquote{Probus and Virgil}, review of Maria Luisa Delvigo, \emph{Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta} (Pisa, 1987), in \emph{CR}, \textsc{ns} 39 (1989), 27--8. -%<y>Jocelyn, H. D. (1989), \enquote{Probus and Virgil}, review of M. L. Delvigo (1987), \emph{Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta} (Pisa), in \emph{CR}, \textsc{ns} 39: 27--8. +%<n|m>H. D. Jocelyn, \enquote{Probus and Virgil}, review of Maria Luisa Delvigo, \emph{Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta} (Pisa, 1987), in \emph{CR}, \textsc{ns} 39 (1989), 27--8. +%<a|y>Jocelyn, H. D. (1989), \enquote{Probus and Virgil}, review of M. L. Delvigo (1987), \emph{Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta} (Pisa), in \emph{CR}, \textsc{ns} 39: 27--8. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @review{jocelyn1989pav, author = {H. D. Jocelyn}, title = {Probus and Virgil}, @@ -2153,7 +2315,7 @@ Stookey, R. W. (1974), \enquote{Social Structure and Politics in the Yemen Arab title = {Testo virgiliano e tradizione indiretta}, location = {Pisa}, date = {1987}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2167,26 +2329,26 @@ Biblatex defines \code{book} as a monograph, written either by a single author, \subsection{Basic form} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1> {eliot1977m} George Eliot, \emph{Middlemarch} (New York: W. W. Norton, 1977). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @book{eliot1977m, author = {George Eliot}, title = {Middlemarch}, location = {New York}, publisher = {W. W. Norton}, date = {1977}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2195,16 +2357,16 @@ George Eliot, \emph{Middlemarch} (New York: W. W. Norton, 1977). Antonia Tissoni Benvenuti, \emph{L'\emph{Orfeo} del Poliziano} (Padua: Editrice Antenore, 1986). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @book{benvenuti1986op, author = {Antonia Tissoni Benvenuti}, title = {L'\emph{Orfeo} del Poliziano}, location = {Padua}, publisher = {Editrice Antenore}, date = {1986}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2213,28 +2375,30 @@ Antonia Tissoni Benvenuti, \emph{L'\emph{Orfeo} del Poliziano} (Padua: Editrice Roderick O'Conor, \emph{A Sentimental Journal through \enquote{Finnegan's Wake}, with a Map of the Liffey} (Dublin: HCE Press, 1977). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @book{oconor1977sjf, author = {Roderick O'Conor}, title = {A Sentimental Journal through \enquote{Finnegan's Wake}, with a Map of the {Liffey}}, location = {Dublin}, publisher = {HCE Press}, date = {1977}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.5> {lyons1981lli} -Lyons, J. (1981\emph{a}), \emph{Language and Linguistics: An Introduction} (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press). +%<a>Lyons, J. (1981), +%<y>Lyons, J. (1981\emph{a}), +\emph{Language and Linguistics: An Introduction} (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @book{lyons1981lli, author = {John Lyons}, date = {1981}, @@ -2242,101 +2406,103 @@ Lyons, J. (1981\emph{a}), \emph{Language and Linguistics: An Introduction} (Camb subtitle = {An Introduction}, location = {Cambridge}, publisher = {Cambridge University Press}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.5> {lyons1981lmc} -Lyons, J. (1981\emph{b}), \emph{Language, Meaning and Context} (London: Fontana Paperbacks). +%<a>Lyons, J. (1981), +%<y>Lyons, J. (1981\emph{b}), +\emph{Language, Meaning and Context} (London: Fontana Paperbacks). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @book{lyons1981lmc, author = {John Lyons}, date = {1981}, title = {Language, Meaning and Context}, location = {London}, publisher = {Fontana Paperbacks}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \subsection{No publisher} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location).} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S18.1.3> {rogers1986tmp} C.~D.~Rogers, \emph{Tracing Missing Persons} (Manchester, 1986). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @book{rogers1986tmp, author = {C. D. Rogers}, title = {Tracing Missing Persons}, location = {Manchester}, date = {1986}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {smith1988fag} Smith, T. (1988), \emph{Famine and Gender} (New Haven, Conn.). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @book{smith1988fag, author = {Smith, T.}, title = {Famine and Gender}, date = {1988}, location = {New Haven, Conn.}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \subsection{Edited book} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).} -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {boas.botschuyver1952dc} -%<n>\emph{Distichia Catonis}, ed. Marcus Boas and Henricus Johannes Botschuyver (Amsterdam, 1952). -%<y>\emph{Distichia Catonis} (1952), ed. M.\ Boas and H.\ J.\ Botschuyver (Amsterdam). +%<n|m>\emph{Distichia Catonis}, ed. Marcus Boas and Henricus Johannes Botschuyver (Amsterdam, 1952). +%<a|y>\emph{Distichia Catonis} (1952), ed. M.\ Boas and H.\ J.\ Botschuyver (Amsterdam). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{boas.botschuyver1952dc, title = {Distichia Catonis}, editor = {Marcus Boas and Henricus Johannes Botschuyver}, location = {Amsterdam}, date = {1952}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2344,95 +2510,95 @@ Smith, T. (1988), \emph{Famine and Gender} (New Haven, Conn.). Biblatex defines \code{collection} as a book made up of multiple self-contained contributions from distinct authors. There is no overall author: use the regular \code{book} entry type for collections of a single author’s work. The editor in this case has a more active role and therefore comes before the title. -%<n>\spec{Editor (\lit{ed.}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Editor (Year) (\lit{ed.}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Editor (\lit{ed.}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Editor (Year) (\lit{ed.}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1> {stewart.etal1994mb} Rosemary Stewart et al. (eds.), \emph{Managing in Britain} (London, 1994). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @collection{stewart.etal1994mb, editor = {Rosemary Stewart and Jean-Louis Barsoux and Alfred Kieser and Hans-Dieter Ganter and Peter Walgenbach}, title = {Managing in {Britain}}, location = {London}, date = {1994}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {barnes.griffin1989pte} Barnes, J., and Griffin, M. T. (1989) (eds.), \emph{Philosophia Togata: Essays on Philosophy and Roman Society} (Oxford). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @collection{barnes.griffin1989pte, editor = {Jonathan Barnes and Miriam T. Griffin}, date = {1989}, title = {Philosophia Togata}, subtitle = {Essays on Philosophy and Roman Society}, location = {Oxford}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y>% +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y>% -%</n|y> -%<*y> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {hankinson1988mmm} Hankinson, R. J. (1988) (ed.), \emph{Method, Medicine, and Metaphysics} (Edmonton, Alta.). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @collection{hankinson1988mmm, editor = {R. J. Hankinson}, date = {1988}, title = {Method, Medicine, and Metaphysics}, location = {Edmonton, Alta.}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \section{Reference works} Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead). -\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \textsf{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.} +\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.} \begin{tcblisting}{listing only} \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true} \end{tcblisting} -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {fortenbaugh.etal1991tes} -%<n>\emph{Theophrastus of Eresus: Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence}, ed. William W. Fortenbaugh et al., 2 vols. (Philosophia Antiqua, 54; Leiden, 1991). -%<y>\emph{Theophrastus of Eresus: Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence} (1991), ed. W. W. Fortenbaugh et al., 2 vols. (Philosophia Antiqua, 54; Leiden). +%<n|m>\emph{Theophrastus of Eresus: Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence}, ed. William W. Fortenbaugh et al., 2 vols. (Philosophia Antiqua, 54; Leiden, 1991). +%<a|y>\emph{Theophrastus of Eresus: Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence} (1991), ed. W. W. Fortenbaugh et al., 2 vols. (Philosophia Antiqua, 54; Leiden). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvreference{fortenbaugh.etal1991tes, title = {{Theophrastus} of {Eresus}}, subtitle = {Sources for his Life, Writings, Thought, and Influence}, @@ -2443,7 +2609,7 @@ Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are ty number = {54}, location = {Leiden}, date = {1991}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2456,8 +2622,8 @@ Biblatex provides additional entry types for multi-volume works: \code{mvbook}, Where all volumes were published consistently, the following form is used: -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher, Year), VolNo. Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher), VolNo. Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher, Year), VolNo. Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher), VolNo. Pages.} %<*n> \begin{egcite}{\dots(Brussels, 1867--88), ii. 367--8} @@ -2465,45 +2631,46 @@ Where all volumes were published consistently, the following form is used: {straeten1867lmp} \end{egcite} %</n> -%<*y> +%<*m|a|y> \begin{egcite}{} -\parencite[ii.~\mkcomprange{367-368}]{straeten1867lmp} +\parencite[ii.~\mkcomprange{367-368}]% +{straeten1867lmp} \end{egcite} -%</y> +%</m|a|y> \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.6> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.6\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.6> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.6\textdagger> {straeten1867lmp}% -%<n>Edmond Vander Straeten, \emph{La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, 8 vols. (Brussels, 1867--88). -%<y>Vander Straeten, E. (1867--88), \emph{La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, 8 vols. (Brussels). +%<n|m>Edmond Vander Straeten, \emph{La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, 8 vols. (Brussels, 1867--88). +%<a|y>Vander Straeten, E. (1867--88), \emph{La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, 8 vols. (Brussels). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvbook{straeten1867lmp, author = {Edmond {Vander Straeten}}, title = {La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, volumes = {8}, location = {Brussels}, date = {1867/1888}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} Where the publisher changed between volumes, the following form is used: -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher and Location: Publisher, Year–Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher and Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher and Location: Publisher, Year–Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo, n \lit{vols.} (Location: Publisher and Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.6*> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.6*\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.6*> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.6*\textdagger> {ritter1838hap} -%<n>Heinrich Ritter, \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. Alexander J. W. Morrison, 4~vols. (Oxford: Talboys and London: Bohn, 1838--46). -%<y>Ritter, H. (1838--46), \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. A. J. W. Morrison, 4~vols. (Oxford: Talboys and London: Bohn). +%<n|m>Heinrich Ritter, \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. Alexander J. W. Morrison, 4~vols. (Oxford: Talboys and London: Bohn, 1838--46). +%<a|y>Ritter, H. (1838--46), \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. A. J. W. Morrison, 4~vols. (Oxford: Talboys and London: Bohn). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvbook{ritter1838hap, author = {Heinrich Ritter}, title = {The History of Ancient Philosophy}, @@ -2512,7 +2679,7 @@ Where the publisher changed between volumes, the following form is used: location = {Oxford and London}, publisher = {Talboys and Bohn}, date = {1838/1846}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2522,9 +2689,9 @@ Where the publisher changed between volumes, the following form is used: all in \S13.11.1). I am therefore choosing to ignore this unnecessary complication.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> -\tip{You can alternatively use the standard \textsf{biblatex} relation type \code{multivolume}. Note that this construction is not portable to \textsf{oxyear}.} +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> +\tip{You can alternatively use the standard \textsf{biblatex} relation type \code{multivolume}. Note that this construction is not portable to \textsf{oxyear}\slash\textsf{oxalph}.} \begin{bibexbox} <OGS \S15.2.6*> @@ -2532,8 +2699,8 @@ Where the publisher changed between volumes, the following form is used: Heinrich Ritter, \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. Alexander J. W. Morrison, 4~vols., i–iii (Oxford: Talboys, 1838–9), iv (London: Bohn, 1846). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @mvbook{ritter1838hap1-3, author = {Heinrich Ritter}, title = {The History of Ancient Philosophy}, @@ -2554,85 +2721,92 @@ Heinrich Ritter, \emph{The History of Ancient Philosophy}, trans. Alexander J. W location = {London}, publisher = {Bohn}, date = {1846}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*n|y> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|a|y> \subsection{One volume from several} Where the volumes are merely numbered, the following form is used: -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo (Location: Publisher), Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo (Location: Publisher), Pages.} \tip{To get this format, do not use \code{maintitle}: put the title of the whole work in \code{title}.} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> %<*n> \begin{egcite}{\dots ii (Brussels, 1867--88), 367--8} \cite[367--368]{straeten1867lmp.ii} \end{egcite} +%</n> +%<*m> +\begin{egcite}{} +\cite[367--368]{straeten1867lmp.ii} +\end{egcite} +%</m> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.6> {straeten1867lmp.ii} Edmond Vander Straeten, \emph{La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, ii (Brussels, 1867--88). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @mvbook{straeten1867lmp.ii, author = {Edmond {Vander Straeten}}, title = {La Musique aux Pays-Bas avant le XIX\textsuperscript{e} siècle}, volume = {2}, location = {Brussels}, date = {1867/1888}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {annas1983osa} Annas, J. (1983) (ed.), \emph{Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, i (Oxford). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @mvcollection{annas1983osa, editor = {Annas, Julia}, date = {1983}, title = {Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, volume = {1}, location = {Oxford}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> Where the volumes each have their own (sub)title, and they were all published at once (more or less), the following form is used: -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.} \tip{To get this format, use \code{title} for the volume title and \code{maintitle} for the whole work.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.2> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.2> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.2\textdagger> {brady.etal1994hehsa} -%<n>Thomas A. Brady, Jr., Heiko A. Oberman, and James D. Tracy (eds.), \emph{Handbook of European History, 1400–1600: Late Middle Ages, Renaissance and Reformation}, i: \emph{Structures and Assertions} (Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1994). -%<y>Brady, Jr., T. A., Oberman, H. A., and Tracy, J. D. (1994) (eds.), \emph{Handbook of European History, 1400–1600: Late Middle Ages, Renaissance and Reformation}, i: \emph{Structures and Assertions} (Leiden: E. J. Brill). +%<n|m>Thomas A. Brady, Jr., Heiko A. Oberman, and James D. Tracy (eds.), \emph{Handbook of European History, 1400–1600: Late Middle Ages, Renaissance and Reformation}, i: \emph{Structures and Assertions} (Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1994). +%<a|y>Brady, Jr., T. A., Oberman, H. A., and Tracy, J. D. (1994) (eds.), \emph{Handbook of European History, 1400–1600: Late Middle Ages, Renaissance and Reformation}, i: \emph{Structures and Assertions} (Leiden: E. J. Brill). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvcollection{brady.etal1994hehsa, editor = {Brady, Jr., Thomas A. and Heiko A. Oberman and James D. Tracy}, maintitle = {Handbook of European History, 1400–1600}, @@ -2642,7 +2816,7 @@ the following form is used: location = {Leiden}, publisher = {E. J. Brill}, date = {1994}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2651,22 +2825,22 @@ the following form is used: \cite[42-56]{ward.waller1932che} \end{egcite} %</n> -%<*y> +%<*m|a|y> \begin{egcite}{} \parencite[42-56]% {ward.waller1932che} \end{egcite} -%</y> +%</m|a|y> \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.6> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.6\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.6> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.6\textdagger> {ward.waller1932che} -%<n>A. W. Ward and A. E. Waller (eds.), \emph{The Cambridge History of English Literature}, xii: \emph{The Nineteenth Century} (Cambridge: CUP, 1932). -%<y>Ward, A. W., and Waller, A. E. (1932) (eds.), \emph{The Cambridge History of English Literature}, xii: \emph{The Nineteenth Century} (Cambridge: CUP). +%<n|m>A. W. Ward and A. E. Waller (eds.), \emph{The Cambridge History of English Literature}, xii: \emph{The Nineteenth Century} (Cambridge: CUP, 1932). +%<a|y>Ward, A. W., and Waller, A. E. (1932) (eds.), \emph{The Cambridge History of English Literature}, xii: \emph{The Nineteenth Century} (Cambridge: CUP). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvcollection{ward.waller1932che, editor = {A. W. Ward and A. E. Waller}, maintitle = {The Cambridge History of English Literature}, @@ -2675,7 +2849,7 @@ the following form is used: location = {Cambridge}, publisher = {CUP}, date = {1932}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2683,20 +2857,20 @@ Where the volumes each have their own (sub)title, and there are many volumes spanning years and possibly publishers, the following form is used: -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{VolTitle}, (\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title) (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{VolTitle}, (\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title) (Location: Publisher), Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{VolTitle}, [\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title] (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{VolTitle}, [\lit{vol.} VolNo \lit{of} Title] (Location: Publisher), Pages.} \tip{To get this format, use \code{book} instead of \code{mvbook}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.7> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.7\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.7> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.7\textdagger> {fischer1989asf} -%<n>David Hackett Fischer, \emph{Albion’s Seed: Four British Folkways in America}, [vol.\ i of \emph{America: A Cultural History}] (New York: Oxford University Press, 1989). -%<y>Fischer, D. H. (1989), \emph{Albion’s Seed: Four British Folkways in America}, [vol.\ i of \emph{America: A Cultural History}] (New York: Oxford University Press). +%<n|m>David Hackett Fischer, \emph{Albion’s Seed: Four British Folkways in America}, [vol.\ i of \emph{America: A Cultural History}] (New York: Oxford University Press, 1989). +%<a|y>Fischer, D. H. (1989), \emph{Albion’s Seed: Four British Folkways in America}, [vol.\ i of \emph{America: A Cultural History}] (New York: Oxford University Press). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{fischer1989asf, author = {David Hackett Fischer}, title = {Albion’s Seed}, @@ -2707,7 +2881,7 @@ the following form is used: location = {New York}, publisher = {Oxford University Press}, date = {1989}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2715,18 +2889,18 @@ the following form is used: Where works have significant introductions, forewords, afterwords, illustrations, etc.\ this may be noted as follows: -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{with an} Addition \lit{by} Contributor (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{with an} Addition \lit{by} Contributor (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{with an} Addition \lit{by} Contributor (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{with an} Addition \lit{by} Contributor (Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.1\textdagger> {twain1971cyk} -%<n>Mark Twain, \emph{A Connecticut Yankee at King Arthur's Court}, with an introduction by Justin Kaplan (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1971). -%<y>Twain, M. (1971), \emph{A Connecticut Yankee at King Arthur's Court}, with an introduction by J. Kaplan (Harmondsworth: Penguin). +%<n|m>Mark Twain, \emph{A Connecticut Yankee at King Arthur's Court}, with an introduction by Justin Kaplan (Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1971). +%<a|y>Twain, M. (1971), \emph{A Connecticut Yankee at King Arthur's Court}, with an introduction by J. Kaplan (Harmondsworth: Penguin). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{twain1971cyk, author = {Mark Twain}, title = {A {Connecticut} Yankee at {King} {Arthur's} Court}, @@ -2734,24 +2908,24 @@ Where works have significant introductions, forewords, afterwords, illustrations location = {Harmondsworth}, publisher = {Penguin}, date = {1971}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} Translators are credited as follows: -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.} Translator(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.} Translator(s) (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.} Translator(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.} Translator(s) (Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.14> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.14> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger> {bischoff1990lpa} -%<n>Bernhard Bischoff, \emph{Latin Palaeography: Antiquity and the Middle Ages}, trans. Dáibhi Ó Cróinín and David Ganz (Cambridge, 1990). -%<y>Bischoff, B. (1990), \emph{Latin Palaeography: Antiquity and the Middle Ages}, trans. D. Ó Cróinín and D. Ganz (Cambridge). +%<n|m>Bernhard Bischoff, \emph{Latin Palaeography: Antiquity and the Middle Ages}, trans. Dáibhi Ó Cróinín and David Ganz (Cambridge, 1990). +%<a|y>Bischoff, B. (1990), \emph{Latin Palaeography: Antiquity and the Middle Ages}, trans. D. Ó Cróinín and D. Ganz (Cambridge). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{bischoff1990lpa, author = {Bernhard Bischoff}, title = {Latin Palaeography}, @@ -2759,22 +2933,22 @@ Translators are credited as follows: translator = {Dáibhi Ó Cróinín and David Ganz}, location = {Cambridge}, date = {1990}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.\ with} Addition Translator(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.\ with} Addition Translator(s) (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.\ with} Addition Translator(s) (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, \lit{trans.\ with} Addition Translator(s) (Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.14> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.14> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.14\textdagger> {martorell1984tlb} -%<n>Joanat Martorell, \emph{Tirant lo Blanc}, trans. with foreword David H. Rosenthal (London, 1984). -%<y>Martorell, J. (1984), \emph{Tirant lo Blanc}, trans. with foreword D. H. Rosenthal (London). +%<n|m>Joanat Martorell, \emph{Tirant lo Blanc}, trans. with foreword David H. Rosenthal (London, 1984). +%<a|y>Martorell, J. (1984), \emph{Tirant lo Blanc}, trans. with foreword D. H. Rosenthal (London). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{martorell1984tlb, author = {Joanat Martorell}, title = {Tirant lo Blanc}, @@ -2782,7 +2956,7 @@ Translators are credited as follows: foreword = {David H. Rosenthal}, location = {London}, date = {1984}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2793,43 +2967,45 @@ Translators are credited as follows: Where the author\slash editor is common to both, the following form is used: -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher).} \tip{This is the format used by the entry type \code{book}} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> %<*n> \begin{egcite}{\dots (3rd edn., 1990), 419--21} \cite[419-421]{baker1990iel} \end{egcite} +%</n> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.3> {baker1990iel} J. H. Baker, \emph{An Introduction to English Legal History} (3rd edn., 1990). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @book{baker1990iel, author = {J. H. Baker}, title = {An Introduction to {English} Legal History}, edition = {3}, date = {1990}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S17.3.2*> {maitland2001mvr} Maitland, G. (2001), \emph{Maitland's Vertebral Manipulation} (6th edn., Oxford: Butterworth--Heinemann). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @book{maitland2001mvr, author = {G. Maitland}, title = {Maitland's Vertebral Manipulation}, @@ -2837,22 +3013,22 @@ Maitland, G. (2001), \emph{Maitland's Vertebral Manipulation} (6th edn., Oxford: publisher = {Butterworth--Heinemann}, location = {Oxford}, date = {2001}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {beckford1823v} -%<n>William Beckford, \emph{Vathek} (4th edn., London, 1823) [online facsimile], \url{http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Beckford, W. (1823), \emph{Vathek} (4th edn., London) [online facsimile], \url{http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>William Beckford, \emph{Vathek} (4th edn., London, 1823) [online facsimile], \url{http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Beckford, W. (1823), \emph{Vathek} (4th edn., London) [online facsimile], \url{http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{beckford1823v, author = {William Beckford}, title = {Vathek}, @@ -2862,52 +3038,52 @@ Maitland, G. (2001), \emph{Maitland's Vertebral Manipulation} (6th edn., Oxford: howpublished = {online facsimile}, url = {http://beckford.c18.net/wbvathek1823.html}, urldate = {2013-11-05}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} Where the editor has changed, the following form is used: -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, nth \lit{edn.}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), nth \lit{edn.}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, nth \lit{edn.}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), nth \lit{edn.}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher).} \tip{This format is used by entry type \code{reference}} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.3> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.3> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.3\textdagger> {knowles1999odq} -%<n>\emph{The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations}, 5th edn., ed. Elizabeth Knowles (Oxford, 1999). -%<y>\emph{The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations} (1999), 5th edn., ed. E. Knowles (Oxford). +%<n|m>\emph{The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations}, 5th edn., ed. Elizabeth Knowles (Oxford, 1999). +%<a|y>\emph{The Oxford Dictionary of Quotations} (1999), 5th edn., ed. E. Knowles (Oxford). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @reference{knowles1999odq, title = {The {Oxford} Dictionary of Quotations}, edition = {5}, editor = {Elizabeth Knowles}, publisher = {Oxford}, date = {1999}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \subsection{Both first and later edition} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Year; nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Year; nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Year; nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Year; nth \lit{edn.}, Location: Publisher).} \tip{Use the \code{orig} fields for the earlier edition.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.3> {denniston1934gp} J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @book{denniston1934gp, author = {J. D. Denniston}, title = {The Greek Particles}, @@ -2915,8 +3091,8 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954). edition = {2}, location = {Oxford}, date = {1954}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -2927,8 +3103,8 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954). {[John Gibbon]}, \emph{Day-Fatality: Or Some Observations on Days Lucky and Unlucky}, (London, 1678; rev.~edn., 1686). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @book{gibbon1686dfs, author = {John Gibbon}, author+an = {=inferred}, @@ -2938,21 +3114,21 @@ J. D. Denniston, \emph{The Greek Particles} (1934; 2nd edn., Oxford, 1954). origlocation = {London}, origdate = {1678}, date = {1686}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after ‘rev. edn.’ in the above reference; this may be an error.} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {marx1867ccp} Marx, K. (1867), \emph{Capital: A Critique of Political Economy}, i, trans. B. Fowkes (New York, 1977). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @mvbook{marx1867ccp, author = {K. Marx}, origdate = {1867}, @@ -2962,36 +3138,37 @@ Marx, K. (1867), \emph{Capital: A Critique of Political Economy}, i, trans. B. F translator = {B. Fowkes}, location = {New York}, date = {1977}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \subsection{Republications} If the publication has not been revised, but has been re-typeset by a different publisher, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests putting the original date in a note at the end, rather than within the publication block% -%<n>. -%<y>, but this does not affect the author–date style since the original date is at the head of the reference anyway. +%<n|m>. +%<a|y>, but this does not affect the author–date style since the original date is at the head of the reference anyway. -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{first pub.} Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (OrigYear), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{originally pub.} Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (OrigYear), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).} -%<n>\tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.} +%<n|m>\tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.} +%<n|m>\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.3> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.3> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.3\textdagger> {bettelheim1976uem} -%<n>Bruno Bettelheim, \emph{The Uses of Enchantment: The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales} (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1988) (first pub. 1976). -%<y>Bettelheim, B. (1976), \emph{The Uses of Enchantment: The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales} (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1988). +%<n|m>Bruno Bettelheim, \emph{The Uses of Enchantment: The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales} (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1988) (first pub. 1976). +%<a|y>Bettelheim, B. (1976), \emph{The Uses of Enchantment: The Meaning and Importance of Fairy Tales} (Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1988). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{bettelheim1976uem, author = {Bruno Bettelheim}, title = {The Uses of Enchantment}, @@ -3000,26 +3177,26 @@ rather than within the publication block% publisher = {Penguin Books}, date = {1988}, origdate = {1976}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \subsection{Reprints} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).} \tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.4> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.4> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger> {adam.tannery1897odd} -%<n>C. Adam and D. Tannery (eds.), \emph{Œuvres de Descartes} (Paris: Cerf, 1897--1913; repr. Paris: J. Vrin, CNRS, 1964--76). -%<y>Adam, C. and Tannery, D. (1897--1913) (eds.), \emph{Œuvres de Descartes} (Paris: Cerf; repr. Paris: J. Vrin, CNRS, 1964--76). +%<n|m>C. Adam and D. Tannery (eds.), \emph{Œuvres de Descartes} (Paris: Cerf, 1897--1913; repr. Paris: J. Vrin, CNRS, 1964--76). +%<a|y>Adam, C. and Tannery, D. (1897--1913) (eds.), \emph{Œuvres de Descartes} (Paris: Cerf; repr. Paris: J. Vrin, CNRS, 1964--76). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @collection{adam.tannery1897odd, editor = {C. Adam and D. Tannery}, title = {Œuvres de Descartes}, @@ -3030,19 +3207,19 @@ rather than within the publication block% location = {Paris}, publisher = {J. Vrin, CNRS}, date = {1964/1976}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.4> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.4> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger> {southern1991sap} -%<n>R. W. Southern, \emph{Saint Anselm: A Portrait in a Landscape} (rev. repr., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991). -%<y>Southern, R. W. (1991), \emph{Saint Anselm: A Portrait in a Landscape} (rev. repr., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press). +%<n|m>R. W. Southern, \emph{Saint Anselm: A Portrait in a Landscape} (rev. repr., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991). +%<a|y>Southern, R. W. (1991), \emph{Saint Anselm: A Portrait in a Landscape} (rev. repr., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{southern1991sap, author = {R. W. Southern}, title = {Saint Anselm}, @@ -3051,24 +3228,24 @@ rather than within the publication block% location = {Cambridge}, publisher = {Cambridge University Press}, date = {1991}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).} \tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.4> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.4> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.4\textdagger> {allen1594kkk} -%<n>E. Allen, \emph{A Knack to Know a Knave} (London, 1594; facs. edn., Oxford: Malone Society Reprints, 1963). -%<y>Allen, E. (1594), \emph{A Knack to Know a Knave} (London; facs. edn., Oxford: Malone Society Reprints, 1963). +%<n|m>E. Allen, \emph{A Knack to Know a Knave} (London, 1594; facs. edn., Oxford: Malone Society Reprints, 1963). +%<a|y>Allen, E. (1594), \emph{A Knack to Know a Knave} (London; facs. edn., Oxford: Malone Society Reprints, 1963). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{allen1594kkk, author = {E. Allen}, title = {A Knack to Know a Knave}, @@ -3078,7 +3255,7 @@ rather than within the publication block% location = {Oxford}, publisher = {Malone Society Reprints}, date = {1963}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3090,14 +3267,14 @@ then the new title and its details after a semicolon. \tip{The standard \code{relatedtype} value \code{reprintas} is supported.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.13> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.13\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.13> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.13\textdagger> {hare1949wwb} -%<n>Cyril Hare, \emph{When the Wind Blows} (London, 1949); repr. as \emph{The Wind Blows Death} (London, 1987). -%<y>Hare, C. (1949), \emph{When the Wind Blows} (London); repr. as \emph{The Wind Blows Death} (London, 1987). +%<n|m>Cyril Hare, \emph{When the Wind Blows} (London, 1949); repr. as \emph{The Wind Blows Death} (London, 1987). +%<a|y>Hare, C. (1949), \emph{When the Wind Blows} (London); repr. as \emph{The Wind Blows Death} (London, 1987). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{hare1949wwb, author = {Cyril Hare}, title = {When the Wind Blows}, @@ -3110,23 +3287,23 @@ then the new title and its details after a semicolon. title = {The Wind Blows Death}, location = {London}, date = {1987}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \tip{A more generalized version of this relation is available. - If you set the \code{relatedtype} to the \textsf{oxref}-specific keyword \code{editedas}, + If you set the \code{relatedtype} to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific keyword \code{editedas}, the edition and any editorial contributions will be printed in the linking text.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.12*> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.128\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.12*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.128\textdagger> {berkenhout1769onh} -%<n>John Berkenhout, \emph{Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 3 vols. (London, 1769–72); rev. edn., as \emph{A Synopsis of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 2 vols. (London, 1789). -%<y>Berkenhout, J. (1769–72), \emph{Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 3 vols. (London); rev. edn., as \emph{A Synopsis of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 2 vols. (London, 1789). +%<n|m>John Berkenhout, \emph{Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 3 vols. (London, 1769–72); rev. edn., as \emph{A Synopsis of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 2 vols. (London, 1789). +%<a|y>Berkenhout, J. (1769–72), \emph{Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 3 vols. (London); rev. edn., as \emph{A Synopsis of the Natural History of Great Britain}, 2 vols. (London, 1789). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvbook{berkenhout1769onh, author = {John Berkenhout}, title = {Outlines of the Natural History of Great Britain}, @@ -3142,19 +3319,19 @@ then the new title and its details after a semicolon. edition = {revised}, location = {London}, date = {1789}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.13> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.13\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.13> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.13\textdagger> {lower1665dtw} -%<n>Richard Lower, \emph{Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus Edmundum De Meara Ormoniensem Hibernum M.D.} (London, 1665); facs. edn. with introduction, ed. and trans. Kenneth Dewhurst, as \emph{Richard Lower's \enquote{Vindicatio}: A Defence of the Experimental Method} (Oxford, 1983). -%<y>Lower, R. (1665), \emph{Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus Edmundum De Meara Ormoniensem Hibernum M.D.} (London); facs. edn. with introduction, ed. and trans. K. Dewhurst, as \emph{Richard Lower's \enquote{Vindicatio}: A Defence of the Experimental Method} (Oxford, 1983). +%<n|m>Richard Lower, \emph{Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus Edmundum De Meara Ormoniensem Hibernum M.D.} (London, 1665); facs. edn. with introduction, ed. and trans. Kenneth Dewhurst, as \emph{Richard Lower's \enquote{Vindicatio}: A Defence of the Experimental Method} (Oxford, 1983). +%<a|y>Lower, R. (1665), \emph{Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus Edmundum De Meara Ormoniensem Hibernum M.D.} (London); facs. edn. with introduction, ed. and trans. K. Dewhurst, as \emph{Richard Lower's \enquote{Vindicatio}: A Defence of the Experimental Method} (Oxford, 1983). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{lower1665dtw, author = {Richard Lower}, title = {Diatribæ Thomæ Willisii Doct. Med. \& Profess. Oxon. De febribus Vindicatio adversus @@ -3173,14 +3350,14 @@ then the new title and its details after a semicolon. edition = {facsimile}, location = {Oxford}, date = {1983}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \subsection{Co-publications\slash co-editions} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> %<*y> The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} provides a special format for expressing works that are co-published by several publishers at once. \textsf{Oxnotes} implements it using the \code{relatedtype} keyword \code{copub}. Since it is not suitable for author–year citation styles, no effort is made to make it work for \textsf{oxyear}; you should cite the edition you used, and either ignore the other or mention it in an \code{addendum}. @@ -3220,21 +3397,21 @@ L. A. Holford-Strevens, \emph{Aulus Gellius} (London: Duckworth, 1988; Chapel Hi \end{bibexbox} %</n> -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> If the work is published under two different titles, it is a good idea to provide both to make it easier to locate. \tip{Use a generic relation and specify the country details in the \code{relatedstring}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.5> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.5> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.5\textdagger> {salinger1953ns} -%<n>J. D. Salinger, \emph{Nine Stories} (Boston: Little, Brown, 1953), published in the UK as \emph{For Esmé---With Love and Squalor, and Other Stories} (London: Hamish Hamilton, 1953). -%<y>Salinger, J. D. (1953), \emph{Nine Stories} (Boston: Little, Brown), published in the UK as \emph{For Esmé---With Love and Squalor, and Other Stories} (London: Hamish Hamilton, 1953). +%<n|m>J. D. Salinger, \emph{Nine Stories} (Boston: Little, Brown, 1953), published in the UK as \emph{For Esmé---With Love and Squalor, and Other Stories} (London: Hamish Hamilton, 1953). +%<a|y>Salinger, J. D. (1953), \emph{Nine Stories} (Boston: Little, Brown), published in the UK as \emph{For Esmé---With Love and Squalor, and Other Stories} (London: Hamish Hamilton, 1953). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{salinger1953ns, author = {J. D. Salinger}, title = {Nine Stories}, @@ -3249,27 +3426,27 @@ provide both to make it easier to locate. location = {London}, publisher = {Hamish Hamilton}, date = {1953}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \section{Works from a series} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Series; Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Series; Location: Publisher).} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Series; Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Series; Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.7> {garlandia1972dmm} Johannes de Garlandia, \emph{De mensurabili musica}, ed. Erich Reimer, 2 vols. (Beihefte zum Archiv für Musikwissenschaft, 10--11; Wiesbaden, 1972). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @mvbook{garlandia1972dmm, author = {Johannes de Garlandia}, title = {De mensurabili musica}, @@ -3279,64 +3456,66 @@ Johannes de Garlandia, \emph{De mensurabili musica}, ed. Erich Reimer, 2 vols. ( number = {10--11}, publisher = {Wiesbaden}, date = {1972}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {barnes1982ari} Barnes, J. (1982), \emph{Aristotle} (Past Masters; Oxford). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @book{barnes1982ari, author = {Jonathan Barnes}, date = {1982}, title = {Aristotle}, series = {Past Masters}, location = {Oxford}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (nth \lit{ser.}, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (nth \lit{ser.}).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (nth \lit{ser.}, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (nth \lit{ser.}).} \section{Pre-publication book} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, \lit{forthcoming}).} -%<y>\spec{Author (\lit{forthcoming}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, \lit{forthcoming}).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (\lit{forthcoming}), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).} -%</n|y> -%<*y> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {smithFCgaf} -Smith, P. (forthcoming \emph{a}), \emph{Gender and Famine}, 2 vols. (London). +%<a>Smith, P. (forthcoming), +%<y>Smith, P. (forthcoming \emph{a}), +\emph{Gender and Famine}, 2 vols. (London). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @mvbook{smithFCgaf, author = {P. Smith}, title = {Gender and Famine}, volumes = {2}, location = {London}, pubstate = {forthcoming}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \chapter{Works within books}\label{sec:inbook} \chapterprecis{inbook, bookinbook, suppbook, incollection, suppcollection, inreference} @@ -3345,20 +3524,20 @@ Smith, P. (forthcoming \emph{a}), \emph{Gender and Famine}, 2 vols. (London). The \code{inbook} entry type is intended for books that consist of several self-contained works by the same author, for citing one of these works. -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.}, \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.}, \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher), Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.}, \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.}, \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher), Pages.} \tip{If you provide \code{bookauthor}, and it is the same as the \code{author}, the second instance of the name will replaced by \enquote{id.}\slash \enquote{ead.}\slash \enquote{eid.}\slash \enquote{eaed.} Use the \code{gender} field to select which is used.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.11*> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.11*\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.11*> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.11*\textdagger> {kristeller1979thm} -%<n>Paul Oskar Kristeller, \enquote{The Aristotelian Tradition}, in id., \emph{Renaissance Thought and Its Sources}, ed. Michael Mooney (New York: Columbia University Press, 1979). -%<y>Kristeller, P. O. (1979), \enquote{The Aristotelian Tradition}, in id., \emph{Renaissance Thought and Its Sources}, ed. M. Mooney (New York: Columbia University Press). +%<n|m>Paul Oskar Kristeller, \enquote{The Aristotelian Tradition}, in id., \emph{Renaissance Thought and Its Sources}, ed. Michael Mooney (New York: Columbia University Press, 1979). +%<a|y>Kristeller, P. O. (1979), \enquote{The Aristotelian Tradition}, in id., \emph{Renaissance Thought and Its Sources}, ed. M. Mooney (New York: Columbia University Press). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @inbook{kristeller1979thm, author = {Paul Oskar Kristeller}, gender = {sm}, @@ -3369,22 +3548,22 @@ The \code{inbook} entry type is intended for books that consist of several self- location = {New York}, publisher = {Columbia University Press}, date = {1979}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher), Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, \lit{ed.} Editor(s) (Location: Publisher), Pages.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.6*> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.6*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger> {ashton1991d} -%<n>John Ashton, \enquote{Dualism}, in \emph{Understanding the Fourth Gospel} (Oxford, 1991), 205–37. -%<y>Ashton, J. (1991), \enquote{Dualism}, in \emph{Understanding the Fourth Gospel} (Oxford), 205–37. +%<n|m>John Ashton, \enquote{Dualism}, in \emph{Understanding the Fourth Gospel} (Oxford, 1991), 205–37. +%<a|y>Ashton, J. (1991), \enquote{Dualism}, in \emph{Understanding the Fourth Gospel} (Oxford), 205–37. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @inbook{ashton1991d, author = {John Ashton}, title = {Dualism}, @@ -3392,7 +3571,7 @@ The \code{inbook} entry type is intended for books that consist of several self- location = {Oxford}, date = {1991}, pages = {205-237}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3402,18 +3581,18 @@ The \code{incollection} entry type is intended for citing one of a collection of \subsection{Works in a mixed collection} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} Editors (\lit{eds.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} Editors (\lit{eds.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} Editors (\lit{eds.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} Editors (\lit{eds.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.3> {shearman1993vsf} John Shearman, \enquote{The Vatican Stanze: Functions and Decoration}, in George Holmes (ed.), \emph{Art and Politics in Renaissance Italy: British Academy Lectures} (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1993), 185--240. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @incollection{shearman1993vsf, author = {John Shearman}, title = {The Vatican Stanze}, @@ -3425,20 +3604,20 @@ John Shearman, \enquote{The Vatican Stanze: Functions and Decoration}, in George publisher = {Clarendon Press}, date = {1993}, pages = {185-240}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<NHR \S17.3.2> {magarey1988ect} Magarey, M. E. (1988), \enquote{Examination of the Cervical and Thoracic Spine}, in R. Grant (ed.), \emph{Physical Therapy of the Cervical and Thoracic Spine} (New York: Churchill Livingstone), 81–109. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @incollection{magarey1988ect, author = {M. E. Magarey}, date = {1988}, @@ -3448,8 +3627,8 @@ Magarey, M. E. (1988), \enquote{Examination of the Cervical and Thoracic Spine}, location = {New York}, publisher = {Churchill Livingstone}, pages = {81-109}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3458,8 +3637,8 @@ Magarey, M. E. (1988), \enquote{Examination of the Cervical and Thoracic Spine}, Jessop, B. (1997), \enquote{The Governance of Complexity and Complexity of Governance}, in A. Amin and J. Hausner (eds.), \emph{Beyond Markets and Hierarchy}, (Aldershot: Edward Elgar). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @incollection{jessop1997gcc, author = {Bob Jessop}, date = {1997}, @@ -3468,30 +3647,30 @@ Jessop, B. (1997), \enquote{The Governance of Complexity and Complexity of Gover booktitle = {Beyond Markets and Hierarchy}, location = {Aldershot}, publisher = {Edward Elgar}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \subsection{Works by the editor in a mixed collection} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.} (\lit{ed.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.} (\lit{ed.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.} (\lit{ed.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher, Year), Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in id.} (\lit{ed.}), \emph{BookTitle} (Location: Publisher), Pages.} \tip{If you provide the same values for \code{author} and \code{editor}, the editor name will replaced by \enquote{id.}\slash \enquote{ead.}\slash \enquote{eid.}\slash \enquote{eaed.} Use the \code{gender} field to select which is used.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.3> -%<y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.3> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> {todd1974dhp} -%<n>W. B. Todd, \enquote{David Hume: A Preliminary Bibliography}, in id. (ed.), \emph{Hume and the Enlightenment: Essays Presented to Ernest Campbell Mossner} (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1974). -%<y>Todd, W. B. (1974), \enquote{David Hume: A Preliminary Bibliography}, in id. (ed.), \emph{Hume and the Enlightenment: Essays Presented to Ernest Campbell Mossner} (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press). +%<n|m>W. B. Todd, \enquote{David Hume: A Preliminary Bibliography}, in id. (ed.), \emph{Hume and the Enlightenment: Essays Presented to Ernest Campbell Mossner} (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1974). +%<a|y>Todd, W. B. (1974), \enquote{David Hume: A Preliminary Bibliography}, in id. (ed.), \emph{Hume and the Enlightenment: Essays Presented to Ernest Campbell Mossner} (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @incollection{todd1974dhp, author = {W. B. Todd}, gender = {sm}, @@ -3503,7 +3682,7 @@ Jessop, B. (1997), \enquote{The Governance of Complexity and Complexity of Gover location = {Edinburgh}, publisher = {Edinburgh University Press}, date = {1974}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3517,14 +3696,14 @@ Biblatex provides the \code{bookinbook} entry type for citing a part of an antho \tip{Use \code{origdate} to give the date of original publication.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.3> -%<y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.3> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> {frege1892osr} -%<n>G. Frege, \enquote{On Sense and Reference}, in id., \emph{Philosophical Writings}, trans. and ed. P. T. Geach and M. Black (Oxford: Blackwell, 1952) (originally pub. 1892). -%<y>Frege, G. (1892), \enquote{On Sense and Reference}, in id., \emph{Philosophical Writings}, trans. and ed. P. T. Geach and M. Black (Oxford: Blackwell, 1952). +%<n|m>G. Frege, \enquote{On Sense and Reference}, in id., \emph{Philosophical Writings}, trans. and ed. P. T. Geach and M. Black (Oxford: Blackwell, 1952) (originally pub. 1892). +%<a|y>Frege, G. (1892), \enquote{On Sense and Reference}, in id., \emph{Philosophical Writings}, trans. and ed. P. T. Geach and M. Black (Oxford: Blackwell, 1952). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @bookinbook{frege1892osr, author = {G. Frege}, gender = {sm}, @@ -3537,7 +3716,7 @@ Biblatex provides the \code{bookinbook} entry type for citing a part of an antho publisher = {Blackwell}, date = {1952}, origdate = {1892}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3546,14 +3725,14 @@ Biblatex provides the \code{bookinbook} entry type for citing a part of an antho \tip{Put the key of the original work in \code{related}, and in \code{relatedtype} use the keyword \code{reprintfrom}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.3> -%<y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.3> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> {owen1986pi} -%<n>G. E. L. Owen, \enquote{Philosophical Invective}, in id., \emph{Logic, Science and Dialectic}, ed. M. Nussbaum (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1986), 347--64. From \emph{Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, 1 (1983), 1--25. -%<y>Owen, G. E. L. (1986) \enquote{Philosophical Invective}, in id., \emph{Logic, Science and Dialectic}, ed. M. Nussbaum (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press), 347--64. From \emph{Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, 1 (1983): 1--25. +%<n|m>G. E. L. Owen, \enquote{Philosophical Invective}, in id., \emph{Logic, Science and Dialectic}, ed. M. Nussbaum (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1986), 347--64. From \emph{Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, 1 (1983), 1--25. +%<a|y>Owen, G. E. L. (1986) \enquote{Philosophical Invective}, in id., \emph{Logic, Science and Dialectic}, ed. M. Nussbaum (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press), 347--64. From \emph{Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy}, 1 (1983): 1--25. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @bookinbook{owen1986pi, author = {G. E. L. Owen}, gender = {sm}, @@ -3574,7 +3753,7 @@ Biblatex provides the \code{bookinbook} entry type for citing a part of an antho volume = {1}, date = {1983}, pages = {1-25}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3587,14 +3766,14 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and enc \tip{To omit the \enquote{in} before the book title, either use the \code{inreference} entry type without specifying an editor, or use the \code{incollection} type with an \code{entrysubtype} of \code{yearbook}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.3> -%<y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.3> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.3\textdagger> {dahlhaus1971mmf} -%<n>Carl Dahlhaus, \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, \emph{Jahrbuch des Staatlichen Instituts für Musikforschung Preußischer Kulturbesitz, 1970} (Berlin, 1971), 21–33. -%<y>Dahlhaus, C. (1971), \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, \emph{Jahrbuch des Staatlichen Instituts für Musikforschung Preußischer Kulturbesitz, 1970} (Berlin), 21–33. +%<n|m>Carl Dahlhaus, \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, \emph{Jahrbuch des Staatlichen Instituts für Musikforschung Preußischer Kulturbesitz, 1970} (Berlin, 1971), 21–33. +%<a|y>Dahlhaus, C. (1971), \enquote{Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, \emph{Jahrbuch des Staatlichen Instituts für Musikforschung Preußischer Kulturbesitz, 1970} (Berlin), 21–33. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @inreference{dahlhaus1971mmf, author = {Carl Dahlhaus}, title = {Miszellen zur Musiktheorie des 15.\@ Jahrhunderts}, @@ -3603,7 +3782,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and enc location = {Berlin}, date = {1971}, pages = {21-33}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3611,14 +3790,14 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and enc \section{Supplementary works in books and collections} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.2.6*> -%<y><NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.6*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger> {gill1987intro} -%<n>Roma Gill, introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (Oxford, 1987; repr.\@ 2001). -%<y>Gill, R. (1987), introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (Oxford; repr.\@ 2001). +%<n|m>Roma Gill, introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (Oxford, 1987; repr.\@ 2001). +%<a|y>Gill, R. (1987), introduction in \emph{The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow}, i (Oxford; repr.\@ 2001). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @suppbook{gill1987intro, author = {Roma Gill}, title = {introduction}, @@ -3628,7 +3807,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and enc origdate = {1987}, edition = {reprint}, date = {2001}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3640,24 +3819,24 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} suggests citing entries in dictionaries and enc The \code{proceedings} entry type is intended for a set of conference papers that have been collected together into a single volume. -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{ed.} Editor (Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.12> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.12\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.12> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.12\textdagger> {icp1975pic} -%<n>\emph{Proceedings of the XIV International Congress of Papyrologists: Oxford, 24--31 July 1974} (London, 1975). -%<y>\emph{Proceedings of the XIV International Congress of Papyrologists: Oxford, 24--31 July 1974} (1975) (London). +%<n|m>\emph{Proceedings of the XIV International Congress of Papyrologists: Oxford, 24--31 July 1974} (London, 1975). +%<a|y>\emph{Proceedings of the XIV International Congress of Papyrologists: Oxford, 24--31 July 1974} (1975) (London). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @proceedings{icp1975pic, title = {Proceedings of the {XIV} {International} {Congress} of {Papyrologists}}, subtitle = {{Oxford}, 24--31 {July} 1974}, location = {London}, date = {1975}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3668,6 +3847,11 @@ The \code{proceedings} entry type is intended for a set of conference papers tha \cite[1.52-3]{iau1922tia} \end{egcite} %</n> +%<*m|a> +\begin{egcite}{} +\textcite[1.52-3]{iau1922tia} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> \begin{egcite}{} \parencite[1.52-3]{iau1922tia} @@ -3675,14 +3859,14 @@ The \code{proceedings} entry type is intended for a set of conference papers tha %</y> \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.13> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.13\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.13> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.13\textdagger> {iau1922tia} -%<n>International Astronomical Union, \emph{Transactions of the International Astronomical Union, Rome}, 12--20 May 1922 (London: Imperial College Bookstall, 1922). -%<y>International Astronomical Union (1922), \emph{Transactions of the International Astronomical Union, Rome}, 12--20 May 1922 (London: Imperial College Bookstall). +%<n|m>International Astronomical Union, \emph{Transactions of the International Astronomical Union, Rome}, 12--20 May 1922 (London: Imperial College Bookstall, 1922). +%<a|y>International Astronomical Union (1922), \emph{Transactions of the International Astronomical Union, Rome}, 12--20 May 1922 (London: Imperial College Bookstall). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @proceedings{iau1922tia, organization = {{International Astronomical Union}}, title = {Transactions of the {International} {Astronomical} {Union}, {Rome}}, @@ -3690,21 +3874,21 @@ The \code{proceedings} entry type is intended for a set of conference papers tha location = {London}, publisher = {Imperial College Bookstall}, date = {1922}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} Sometimes the title of the proceedings does not relate to the conference; in which case the following form might be used: -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} {ecdl2009} (not in book) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @proceedings{ecdl2009, editor = {Maristella Agosti and José Borbinha and Sarantos Kapidakis and Christos Papatheodorou and Giannis Tsakonas}, @@ -3717,7 +3901,7 @@ Sometimes the title of the proceedings does not relate to the conference; in whi location = {Berlin}, publisher = {Springer}, date = {2009}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3728,15 +3912,15 @@ The examples here are a combination of Oxford style for proceedings and multi-vo \subsection{All volumes} -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} {iced2009} (not in book) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvproceedings{iced2009, title = {Proceedings of the 17th International Conference on Engineering Design (ICED ’09)}, volumes = {10}, @@ -3747,21 +3931,21 @@ The examples here are a combination of Oxford style for proceedings and multi-vo publisher = {Design Society}, date = {2009}, isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \subsection{One volume} -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{VolTitle} (Year), VolNo \lit{of} \emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, VolNo: \emph{VolTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{VolTitle} (Year), VolNo \lit{of} \emph{Title}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} {iced2009dik} (not in book) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @mvproceedings{iced2009dik, maintitle = {Proceedings of the 17th International Conference on Engineering Design (ICED ’09)}, title = {Design Information and Knowledge}, @@ -3773,7 +3957,7 @@ The examples here are a combination of Oxford style for proceedings and multi-vo publisher = {Design Society}, date = {2009}, isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3781,15 +3965,15 @@ The examples here are a combination of Oxford style for proceedings and multi-vo The \code{inproceedings} entry type is intended for a conference paper published as part of a proceedings volume. For papers that have not been collected into a proceedings volume, or presentation slide sets, use the \code{unpublished} entry type instead (see below). -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor (Series, Number; Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} {tonkin.strelnikov2009iem} (not in book) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @inproceedings{tonkin.strelnikov2009iem, author = {Emma Tonkin and Alexey Strelnikov}, title = {Information Environment Metadata Schema Registry}, @@ -3806,19 +3990,19 @@ The \code{inproceedings} entry type is intended for a conference paper published pages = {487-488}, isbn = {978-3-642-04345-1}, issn = {0302-9743}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year), VolNo. Pages.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher), VolNo. Pages.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher, Year), VolNo. Pages.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{in} \emph{BookTitle}, EventTitle, Venue, ConfDate, \lit{ed.} Editor, n \lit{vols.} (Series, Number; Location: Publisher), VolNo. Pages.} \begin{bibexbox} {ding.etal2009sfc} (not in book) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @inproceedings{ding.etal2009sfc, author = {Lian Ding and Alex Ball and Manjula Patel and Jason Matthews and Glen Mullineux}, title = {Strategies for the Collaborative Use of CAD Product Models}, @@ -3834,24 +4018,24 @@ The \code{inproceedings} entry type is intended for a conference paper published pages = {123-134}, isbn = {978-1-904670-12-4}, url = {http://opus.bath.ac.uk/14285}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \section{Published orations, addresses, lectures, and speeches} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Type, Venue, Date (Location: Publisher, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type, Venue, Date (Location: Publisher).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Type, Venue, Date (Location: Publisher, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type, Venue, Date (Location: Publisher).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.6> -%<y><OGS \S15.6\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.6> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.6\textdagger> {gombrich1957as} -%<n>E. H. Gombrich, \emph{Art and Scholarship}, Inaugural Lecture, University College London, 14 Feb. 1957 (London: H. K. Lewis, 1957). -%<y>Gombrich, E. H. (1957), \emph{Art and Scholarship}, Inaugural Lecture, University College London, 14 Feb. 1957 (London: H. K. Lewis). +%<n|m>E. H. Gombrich, \emph{Art and Scholarship}, Inaugural Lecture, University College London, 14 Feb. 1957 (London: H. K. Lewis, 1957). +%<a|y>Gombrich, E. H. (1957), \emph{Art and Scholarship}, Inaugural Lecture, University College London, 14 Feb. 1957 (London: H. K. Lewis). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @proceedings{gombrich1957as, author = {E. H. Gombrich}, title = {Art and Scholarship}, @@ -3861,7 +4045,7 @@ The \code{inproceedings} entry type is intended for a conference paper published location = {London}, publisher = {H. K. Lewis}, date = {1957}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3869,77 +4053,77 @@ The \code{inproceedings} entry type is intended for a conference paper published \section{Unpublished conference paper} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{paper given at the} ConfTitle, Venue, EventDate.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{paper given at the} ConfTitle, Venue, EventDate.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{paper given at the} ConfTitle, Venue, EventDate.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{paper given at the} ConfTitle, Venue, EventDate.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.6> {holfordstrevens1999hlm} Leofranc Holford-Strevens, \enquote{Humanism and the Language of Music Theory Treatises}, paper given at the 65th Annual Meeting of the American Musicological Society, Kansas City, MO, 4--7 Nov. 1999. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @unpublished{holfordstrevens1999hlm, author = {Leofranc Holford-Strevens}, title = {Humanism and the Language of Music Theory Treatises}, howpublished = {paper given at the 65th Annual Meeting of the American Musicological Society}, location = {Kansas City, MO}, date = {1999-11-04/1999-11-07}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {mason.etal1984nns} Mason, J. B., Habicht, J. P., and Tabatabai, H. (1984), \enquote{Notes on Nutritional Surveillance}, paper delivered to the WHO conference. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @unpublished{mason.etal1984nns, author = {J. B. Mason, and J. P. Habicht and H. Tabatabai}, date = {1984}, title = {Notes on Nutritional Surveillance}, howpublished = {paper delivered to the WHO conference}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \section{Unpublished orations, addresses, lectures, and speeches} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Description.} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Description.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Description.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Description.} -%</n|y> -%<*y> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {pritchard.pritchard1990ard} Pritchard, E., and Pritchard, J. (1990), \enquote{A Reply to Drèze}, unpub.\ paper. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @unpublished{pritchard.pritchard1990ard, author = {E. Pritchard and J. Pritchard}, date = {1990}, title = {A Reply to Drèze}, howpublished = {unpub.\ paper}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \chapter{Grey literature}\label{sec:report} @@ -3947,25 +4131,25 @@ Pritchard, E., and Pritchard, J. (1990), \enquote{A Reply to Drèze}, unpub.\ pa \section{One-off reports} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Institution, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Institution).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Institution, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Institution).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.2.13> -%<y><OGS \S15.2.13\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.13> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.2.13\textdagger> {botswana1980hdr} -%<n>Government of Botswana, \emph{A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana} (Gabarone: Ministry of Local Government and Lands, 1980). -%<y>Government of Botswana (1980), \emph{A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana} (Gabarone: Ministry of Local Government and Lands). +%<n|m>Government of Botswana, \emph{A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana} (Gabarone: Ministry of Local Government and Lands, 1980). +%<a|y>Government of Botswana (1980), \emph{A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana} (Gabarone: Ministry of Local Government and Lands). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @report{botswana1980hdr, author = {{Government of Botswana}}, title = {A Human Drought Relief Programme for Botswana}, location = {Gabarone}, institution = {Ministry of Local Government and Lands}, date = {1980}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3973,23 +4157,23 @@ Pritchard, E., and Pritchard, J. (1990), \enquote{A Reply to Drèze}, unpub.\ pa Some examples in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} repeat the institution in the publisher slot (i.e.\@ the \texttt{institution} field) and some do not.} -%</n|y> -%<*n> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*n|m> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.13> {pac1988upt} Penal Affairs Consortium, \emph{An Unsuitable Place for Treatment: Diverting Mentally Disordered Offenders from Custody} (London, 1988). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @report{pac1988upt, author = {{Penal Affairs Consortium}}, title = {An Unsuitable Place for Treatment}, subtitle = {Diverting Mentally Disordered Offenders from Custody}, location = {London}, date = {1988}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -3998,8 +4182,8 @@ Penal Affairs Consortium, \emph{An Unsuitable Place for Treatment: Diverting Men UNESCO, \emph{The United Nations World Water Development Report 4}, vol. 1: \emph{Managing Water under Uncertainty and Risk} (Paris: UNESCO, 2012), \url{http://unesdoc.unesco.org/images/0021/002156/215644e.pdf}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n> -%<*n|bib> +%</n|m> +%<*n|m|bib> @report{unesco2012unw, author = {UNESCO}, maintitle = {The United Nations World Water Development Report 4}, @@ -4010,20 +4194,20 @@ UNESCO, \emph{The United Nations World Water Development Report 4}, vol. 1: \emp date = {2012}, url = {http://unesdoc.unesco.org/images/0021/002156/215644e.pdf}, urldate = {2013-11-09}} -%</n|bib> -%<*n> +%</n|m|bib> +%<*n|m> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</n> -%<*y> +%</n|m> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.9.1> {who1986nde} WHO (World Health Organization) (1986), \emph{Nutrition and Development in East Africa} (Geneva: WHO) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @report{who1986nde, author = {{World Health Organization}}, shortauthor = {WHO}, @@ -4031,8 +4215,8 @@ WHO (World Health Organization) (1986), \emph{Nutrition and Development in East date = {1986}, location = {Geneva}, institution = {WHO}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4041,8 +4225,8 @@ WHO (World Health Organization) (1986), \emph{Nutrition and Development in East CNNR/GMH (Comisión Nacional de Reparación y Reconciliación y Grupo de Memoria Historica) (2008), \emph{Trujilla: Una Tragedia que no Cesa [Trujilla: A Tragedy Without End]}, (Bogotá, Columbia: CNRR). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @report{cnnr2008tut, shortauthor = {CNNR/GMH}, author = {{Comisión Nacional de Reparación y Reconciliación y Grupo de Memoria Historica}}, @@ -4052,28 +4236,28 @@ CNNR/GMH (Comisión Nacional de Reparación y Reconciliación y Grupo de Memoria titleaddon = {\printtext[title]{{Trujilla:} {A} Tragedy Without End}}, location = {Bogotá, Columbia}, institution = {CNRR}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y> +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \section{Reports with a type or series} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).} -%</n|y> -%<*y> +%</n|m|a|y> +%<*a|y> \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {opcs1979amt} Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979a), \emph{Area Mortality Tables: The Registrar-General's Decennial Supplement for England and Wales 1969–1973}, Series DS, No.~3 (London) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @report{opcs1979amt, author = {{Office of Population Censuses and Surveys}}, date = {1979}, @@ -4082,21 +4266,21 @@ Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979a), \emph{Area Mortality Tables: series = {Series DS}, number = {3}, location = {London}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).} \begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2> {opcs1979pnc} Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Commonwealth and Pakistani Population}, OPCS Monitor PP2 79/1 (London) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @report{opcs1979pnc, author = {{Office of Population Censuses and Surveys}}, date = {1979}, @@ -4104,8 +4288,8 @@ Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New type = {OPCS Monitor}, number = {PP2 79/1}, location = {London}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4116,8 +4300,8 @@ Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Rosenblatt, J., et al. (1988), \emph{The Common Agricultural Policy of the European Community}, International Monetary Fund, occasional paper 62 (Nov.) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</y> -%<*y|bib> +%</a|y> +%<*a|y|bib> @report{rosenblatt.etal1988cap, author = {Julius Rosenblatt and others}, title = {The {Common Agricultural Policy} of the {European Community}}, @@ -4125,57 +4309,57 @@ Rosenblatt, J., et al. (1988), \emph{The Common Agricultural Policy of the Europ series = {International Monetary Fund}, type = {occasional paper}, number = {62}} -%</y|bib> -%<*y> +%</a|y|bib> +%<*a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%</y> -%<*n|y>% +%</a|y> +%<*n|m|a|y>% \section{Theses} -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.5.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.5.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.5.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.5.1\textdagger> {blackburn1970tlp} -%<n>Bonnie J. Blackburn, \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of Chicago, 1970). -%<y>Blackburn, B. J. (1970), \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of Chicago). +%<n|m>Bonnie J. Blackburn, \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of Chicago, 1970). +%<a|y>Blackburn, B. J. (1970), \enquote{The Lupus Problem}, Ph.D. diss. (University of Chicago). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @thesis{blackburn1970tlp, author = {Bonnie J. Blackburn}, title = {The Lupus Problem}, type = {Ph.D. diss.}, institution = {University of Chicago}, date = {1970}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option. -%<n>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).} \chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo} \chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video} -There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \textsf{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}. +There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}. \section{Audio recordings} The basic structure of audio recording entries is as follows: -%<n>\spec{Composer, \emph{Title}, Artist, RecordingDate (RecordingCompany Type Number, PublicationDate) [Medium].} -%<y>\spec{Composer (Year), \emph{Title}, Artist, RecordingDate (RecordingCompany Type Number, PublicationDate) [Medium].} +%<n|m>\spec{Composer, \emph{Title}, Artist, RecordingDate (RecordingCompany Type Number, PublicationDate) [Medium].} +%<a|y>\spec{Composer (RecordingYear), \emph{Title}, Artist, RecordingDate (RecordingCompany Type Number, PublicationDate) [Medium].} If the composer's name is not of interest, it may be omitted or replaced by the artist's name. %<y>In the absence of examples to the contrary, \textsf{oxyear} uses the year of recording at the head of the reference if available, otherwise it uses the year of publication. @@ -4200,7 +4384,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording a publishing company, comma, location, comma, e.g.\@ \enquote{Christophorus-Verlag Herder, Freiburg im Breisgau,} \end{itemize} -\emph{New Hart's Rules} sticks firmly with the first of these, so \textsf{oxref} makes this the easiest choice but provides workarounds to allow you to achieve most of the others if you really need to. +\emph{New Hart's Rules} sticks firmly with the first of these, so \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} makes this the easiest choice but provides workarounds to allow you to achieve most of the others if you really need to. \tip{To get the normal format, put the label name in \code{publisher}, the type of release (e.g.\@ compact disc, audio cassette) in \code{type}, and the catalogue number in \code{number}. In the examples from \emph{New Hart's Rules}, the type is uniformly omitted.} @@ -4213,14 +4397,14 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording \tip{Contrary to the OGS example, but in common with other entry types, the location if provided will be printed before the publisher, separated from it by a colon. (This is why a comma is the default for \cs{recordseriespunct}.) In the absence of a publisher it will be followed by a comma.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.7.2*> -%<y><NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.7.2*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger> {carter1991fsq} -%<n>Elliott Carter, \emph{The Four String Quartets}, Juilliard String Quartet (Sony S2K 47229, 1991). -%<y>Carter, E. (1991), \emph{The Four String Quartets}, Juilliard String Quartet (Sony S2K 47229). +%<n|m>Elliott Carter, \emph{The Four String Quartets}, Juilliard String Quartet (Sony S2K 47229, 1991). +%<a|y>Carter, E. (1991), \emph{The Four String Quartets}, Juilliard String Quartet (Sony S2K 47229). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @music{carter1991fsq, author = {Elliott Carter}, title = {The Four String Quartets}, @@ -4229,19 +4413,19 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording publisher = {Sony}, number = {S2K 47229}, date = {1991}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger> {hillier1989p} -%<n>Paul Hillier, \emph{Proensa} (ECM Records compact disc ECM 1368, 1989). -%<y>Hillier, P. (1989), \emph{Proensa} (ECM Records compact disc ECM 1368). +%<n|m>Paul Hillier, \emph{Proensa} (ECM Records compact disc ECM 1368, 1989). +%<a|y>Hillier, P. (1989), \emph{Proensa} (ECM Records compact disc ECM 1368). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @music{hillier1989p, author = {Paul Hillier}, title = {Proensa}, @@ -4249,19 +4433,19 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording type = {compact disc}, number = {ECM 1368}, date = {1989}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger> {couperin1970pdc} -%<n>Francois Couperin, \emph{Pièces de clavecin: Huit préludes de L'Art de toucher le clavecin. Livre I. Troisième et quatrième ordres}, Huguette Dreyfus (Valois, MB 797, 1970). -%<y>Couperin, F. (1970), \emph{Pièces de clavecin: Huit préludes de L'Art de toucher le clavecin. Livre I. Troisième et quatrième ordres}, H. Dreyfus (Valois, MB 797). +%<n|m>Francois Couperin, \emph{Pièces de clavecin: Huit préludes de L'Art de toucher le clavecin. Livre I. Troisième et quatrième ordres}, Huguette Dreyfus (Valois, MB 797, 1970). +%<a|y>Couperin, F. (1970), \emph{Pièces de clavecin: Huit préludes de L'Art de toucher le clavecin. Livre I. Troisième et quatrième ordres}, H. Dreyfus (Valois, MB 797). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @music{couperin1970pdc, author = {Francois Couperin}, title = {Pièces de clavecin}, @@ -4272,19 +4456,19 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording series = {Valois}, number = {MB 797}, date = {1970}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger> {pageNDmn} -%<n>\emph{The Mirror of Narcissus: Songs by Guillaume de Machaut}, Gothic Voices, dir. Christopher Page (Hyperion compact disc CDA 66087). -%<y>\emph{The Mirror of Narcissus: Songs by Guillaume de Machaut} (n.d.), Gothic Voices, dir. C. Page (Hyperion compact disc CDA 66087). +%<n|m>\emph{The Mirror of Narcissus: Songs by Guillaume de Machaut}, Gothic Voices, dir. Christopher Page (Hyperion compact disc CDA 66087). +%<a|y>\emph{The Mirror of Narcissus: Songs by Guillaume de Machaut} (n.d.), Gothic Voices, dir. C. Page (Hyperion compact disc CDA 66087). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @music{pageNDmn, title = {The Mirror of Narcissus}, subtitle = {Songs by Guillaume do Machaut}, @@ -4295,42 +4479,42 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording publisher = {Hyperion}, type = {compact disc}, number = {CDA 66087}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \tip{To describe the medium in a separate note, use the \texttt{howpublished} field.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.7.2> -%<y><NHR \S18.7.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.7.2> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.7.2\textdagger> {hopkinsNDcar} -%<n>Lightnin' Hopkins, \emph{The Complete Aladdin Recordings} (EMI Blues Series, CDP-7-96843-2) [2-vol.\@ CD set]. -%<y>Lightnin' Hopkins (n.d.), \emph{The Complete Aladdin Recordings} (EMI Blues Series, CDP-7-96843-2) [2-vol.\@ CD set]. +%<n|m>Lightnin' Hopkins, \emph{The Complete Aladdin Recordings} (EMI Blues Series, CDP-7-96843-2) [2-vol.\@ CD set]. +%<a|y>Lightnin' Hopkins (n.d.), \emph{The Complete Aladdin Recordings} (EMI Blues Series, CDP-7-96843-2) [2-vol.\@ CD set]. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @music{hopkinsNDcar, author = {{Lightnin’ Hopkins}}, title = {The Complete Aladdin Recordings}, series = {EMI Blues Series}, number = {CDP-7-96843-2}, howpublished = {2-vol.\@ CD set}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \tip{To describe the medium as part of the publication statement, use the \texttt{type} field.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.1> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.1> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.1\textdagger> {lewis1981lww} -%<n>C. S. Lewis, \emph{The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe}, read by Sir Michael Hordern (2 audio cassettes, TO1611, 1981). -%<y>Lewis, C. S. (1981), \emph{The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe}, read by Sir M. Hordern (2 audio cassettes, TO1611). +%<n|m>C. S. Lewis, \emph{The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe}, read by Sir Michael Hordern (2 audio cassettes, TO1611, 1981). +%<a|y>Lewis, C. S. (1981), \emph{The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe}, read by Sir M. Hordern (2 audio cassettes, TO1611). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @audio{lewis1981lww, author = {C. S. Lewis}, title = {The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe}, @@ -4339,7 +4523,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} offers several ways of expressing the recording type = {2 audio cassettes}, number = {TO1611}, date = {1981}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4350,14 +4534,14 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i \tip{Put the subsequent composer\slash title combinations in new entries, and relate them with a \code{relatedtype} of \code{includes}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.7.2*> -%<y><NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.7.2*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger> {dutilleux1987as} -%<n>Henri Dutilleux, \emph{L'Arbre des songes}, and Peter Maxwell Davies, \emph{Concerto for Violin and Orchestra}, Royal Philharmonic Orchestra, cond. André Previn, violin Isaac Stern (CBS MK 42449, 1987). -%<y>Dutilleux, H. (1987), \emph{L'Arbre des songes}, and Maxwell Davies, P., \emph{Concerto for Violin and Orchestra}, Royal Philharmonic Orchestra, cond. A. Previn, violin I. Stern (CBS MK 42449). +%<n|m>Henri Dutilleux, \emph{L'Arbre des songes}, and Peter Maxwell Davies, \emph{Concerto for Violin and Orchestra}, Royal Philharmonic Orchestra, cond. André Previn, violin Isaac Stern (CBS MK 42449, 1987). +%<a|y>Dutilleux, H. (1987), \emph{L'Arbre des songes}, and Maxwell Davies, P., \emph{Concerto for Violin and Orchestra}, Royal Philharmonic Orchestra, cond. A. Previn, violin I. Stern (CBS MK 42449). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @audio{dutilleux1987as, author = {Henri Dutilleux}, title = {L'Arbre des songes}, @@ -4376,7 +4560,7 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i author = {Maxwell Davies, Peter}, title = {Concerto for Violin and Orchestra}, date = {1987}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4393,14 +4577,14 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i \tip{Use the non-standard entry types \code{inaudio} or \code{inmusic} to reference a single work within an album. Use \code{booktitle} (somewhat loosely) for the album title.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.7.2*> -%<y><NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.7.2*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.7.2*\textdagger> {davis1997sw} -%<n>Miles Davis et al., \enquote{So What}, in \emph{Kind of Blue}, rec. 1959 (Columbia CK 64935, 1997) [CD]. -%<y>Davis, M. et al. (1959), \enquote{So What}, in \emph{Kind of Blue} (Columbia CK 64935, 1997) [CD]. +%<n|m>Miles Davis et al., \enquote{So What}, in \emph{Kind of Blue}, rec. 1959 (Columbia CK 64935, 1997) [CD]. +%<a|y>Davis, M. et al. (1959), \enquote{So What}, in \emph{Kind of Blue} (Columbia CK 64935, 1997) [CD]. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @inaudio{davis1997sw, author = {Miles Davis and others}, title = {So What}, @@ -4411,7 +4595,7 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i number = {CK 64935}, date = {1997}, howpublished = {CD}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4420,42 +4604,42 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i \section{Video recordings} -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year) (Publisher, Number).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year) (Publisher, Number).} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.2> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.2> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> {bbc1987ava} -%<n>\emph{The Ashes: Victory in Australia} (BBCV 4040, 1987). -%<y>\emph{The Ashes: Victory in Australia} (1987) (BBCV 4040). +%<n|m>\emph{The Ashes: Victory in Australia} (BBCV 4040, 1987). +%<a|y>\emph{The Ashes: Victory in Australia} (1987) (BBCV 4040). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @video{bbc1987ava, title = {The {Ashes}}, subtitle = {Victory in {Australia}}, publisher = {BBCV}, number = {4040}, date = {1987}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle} \lit{series} (Publisher, Number, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle} \lit{series} (Publisher, Number).} +%<n|m>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle} \lit{series} (Publisher, Number, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle} \lit{series} (Publisher, Number).} \tip{For an episode in a series, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{episode} and put the series name in \code{maintitle}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.2> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.2> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> {britt1986pho} -%<n>\enquote{Percy and Harold and Other Stories}, \emph{Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends} series (Britt Allcroft 5-014861-100224, 1986). -%<y>\enquote{Percy and Harold and Other Stories} (1986), \emph{Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends} series (Britt Allcroft 5-014861-100224). +%<n|m>\enquote{Percy and Harold and Other Stories}, \emph{Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends} series (Britt Allcroft 5-014861-100224, 1986). +%<a|y>\enquote{Percy and Harold and Other Stories} (1986), \emph{Thomas the Tank Engine and Friends} series (Britt Allcroft 5-014861-100224). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @video{britt1986pho, entrysubtype = {episode}, title = {{Percy} and {Harold} and Other Stories}, @@ -4463,48 +4647,48 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i publisher = {Britt Allcroft}, number = {5-014861-100224}, date = {1986}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{Director (\lit{dir.}), \emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year).} -%<y>\spec{Director (Year) (\lit{dir.}), \emph{Title} (Publisher, Number).} +%<n|m>\spec{Director (\lit{dir.}), \emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{Director (Year) (\lit{dir.}), \emph{Title} (Publisher, Number).} \tip{Use the \texttt{author} field to place a credit at the head of the reference.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.2> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.2> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> {chaplin1936mt} -%<n>Charles Chaplin (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists, 1936). -%<y>Chaplin, C. (1936) (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists). +%<n|m>Charles Chaplin (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists, 1936). +%<a|y>Chaplin, C. (1936) (dir.), \emph{Modern Times} (United Artists). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @movie{chaplin1936mt, author = {Charles Chaplin}, authortype = {director}, title = {Modern Times}, publisher = {United Artists}, date = {1936}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{dir.} Director (Publisher, Number, Year).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{dir.} Director (Publisher, Number).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, \lit{dir.} Director (Publisher, Number, Year).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), \lit{dir.} Director (Publisher, Number).} \tip{Use the \texttt{editor} field to place a credit after the title.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.2> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.2> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> {reiner1983tst} -%<n>\emph{This is Spinal Tap: A Rockumentary by Marti Di Bergi}, dir.\ Rob Reiner (Embassy Pictures, 1983). -%<y>\emph{This is Spinal Tap: A Rockumentary by Marti Di Bergi} (1983), dir.\ R. Reiner (Embassy Pictures). +%<n|m>\emph{This is Spinal Tap: A Rockumentary by Marti Di Bergi}, dir.\ Rob Reiner (Embassy Pictures, 1983). +%<a|y>\emph{This is Spinal Tap: A Rockumentary by Marti Di Bergi} (1983), dir.\ R. Reiner (Embassy Pictures). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @movie{reiner1983tst, title = {This is {Spinal} {Tap}}, subtitle = {A Rockumentary by {Marti} {Di} {Bergi}}, @@ -4512,12 +4696,12 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i editortype = {director}, publisher = {Embassy Pictures}, date = {1983}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year), Credit.} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year) (Publisher, Number), Credit.} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title} (Publisher, Number, Year), Credit.} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year) (Publisher, Number), Credit.} \tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}. If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference. @@ -4525,14 +4709,14 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.2> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.2> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger> {kaurismaki1989lcg} -%<n>\emph{Leningrad Cowboys Go America} (Villealfa Filmproductions, 1989), dir.\@ and screenplay by Aki Kaurismäki, story by Sakke Järvenpää, Aki Kaurismäki, Mato Valtonen. -%<y>\emph{Leningrad Cowboys Go America} (1989) (Villealfa Filmproductions), dir.\@ and screenplay by A. Kaurismäki, story by S. Järvenpää, A. Kaurismäki, M. Valtonen. +%<n|m>\emph{Leningrad Cowboys Go America} (Villealfa Filmproductions, 1989), dir.\@ and screenplay by Aki Kaurismäki, story by Sakke Järvenpää, Aki Kaurismäki, Mato Valtonen. +%<a|y>\emph{Leningrad Cowboys Go America} (1989) (Villealfa Filmproductions), dir.\@ and screenplay by A. Kaurismäki, story by S. Järvenpää, A. Kaurismäki, M. Valtonen. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @movie{kaurismaki1989lcg, title = {Leningrad Cowboys Go America}, publisher = {Villealfa Filmproductions}, @@ -4542,21 +4726,21 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i editoratype = {story by}, editora = {Sakke Järvenpää and Aki Kaurismäki and Mato Valtonen}, options = {endeditor}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \tip{For an online video, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{clip}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {bbc2013iim} -%<n>BBC News, \enquote{Inside India's Mars Mission HQ} [video] (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. -%<y>BBC News (2013), \enquote{Inside India's Mars Mission HQ} [video] (5 Nov.), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>BBC News, \enquote{Inside India's Mars Mission HQ} [video] (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>BBC News (2013), \enquote{Inside India's Mars Mission HQ} [video] (5 Nov.), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @video{bbc2013iim, entrysubtype = {clip}, author = {{BBC News}}, @@ -4564,19 +4748,19 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i date = {2013-11-05}, url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-24826253}, urldate = {2013-11-05}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {rubinstein1956rpc} -%<n>Arthur Rubinstein, \enquote{Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderato, Allegro (Fritz Reiner)} [video], YouTube (recorded 9 Jan. 1956, uploaded 8 Nov. 2011), \url{http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Rubinstein, A. (1956), \enquote{Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderato, Allegro (Fritz Reiner)} [video], YouTube (recorded 9 Jan., uploaded 8 Nov. 2011), \url{http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Arthur Rubinstein, \enquote{Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderato, Allegro (Fritz Reiner)} [video], YouTube (recorded 9 Jan. 1956, uploaded 8 Nov. 2011), \url{http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Rubinstein, A. (1956), \enquote{Rachmaninoff Piano Concerto No. 2, Op. 18, I Moderato, Allegro (Fritz Reiner)} [video], YouTube (recorded 9 Jan., uploaded 8 Nov. 2011), \url{http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @video{rubinstein1956rpc, entrysubtype = {clip}, author = {Arthur Rubinstein}, @@ -4587,7 +4771,7 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i datetype = {uploaded}, url = {http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Vv0Sy9FJrc&list=PLDB11C4F39E09047F}, urldate = {2013-11-09}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4595,47 +4779,47 @@ Sometimes publishers will put several works on a single release without giving i \section{Broadcasts}\label{sec:broadcasts} -The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, including the date, bare. \emph{New Hart's Rules} tends to put the transmittion date in parentheses, perhaps because (\emph{a}) broadcast is a type of publication, (\emph{b}) episodes in some very long-running series are identified by date alone, and (\emph{c}) it may be important to know which broadcast is referenced since the edits might be different. \textsf{Oxref} sides with the latter. +The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, including the date, bare. \emph{New Hart's Rules} tends to put the transmittion date in parentheses, perhaps because (\emph{a}) broadcast is a type of publication, (\emph{b}) episodes in some very long-running series are identified by date alone, and (\emph{c}) it may be important to know which broadcast is referenced since the edits might be different. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} sides with the latter. -%<n>\spec{\emph{Title}, Channel (Location, Date, Time).} -%<y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), Channel (Location, Day Month, Time).} +%<n|m>\spec{\emph{Title}, Channel (Location, Date, Time).} +%<a|y>\spec{\emph{Title} (Year), Channel (Location, Day Month, Time).} \tip{Put the channel in the \code{organization} field.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.14.3*> -%<y><OGS \S15.14.3*\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.14.3*> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.14.3*\textdagger> {canal2001ch} -%<n>\emph{Un Cœur in Hiver}, Canal+ (Paris, 15 May 2001, 11.40 p.m.). -%<y>\emph{Un Cœur in Hiver} (2001), Canal+ (Paris, 15 May, 11.40 p.m.). +%<n|m>\emph{Un Cœur in Hiver}, Canal+ (Paris, 15 May 2001, 11.40 p.m.). +%<a|y>\emph{Un Cœur in Hiver} (2001), Canal+ (Paris, 15 May, 11.40 p.m.). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @video{canal2001ch, title = {Un Cœur in Hiver}, organization = {Canal+}, location = {Paris}, date = {2001-05-15T23:40:00+02:00}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -%<n>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.} -%<y>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.} +%<n|m>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.} +%<a|y>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.} \tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field. If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks. - Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \textsf{oxref} will take care of this for you.} + Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {berger1972ws} -%<n>John Berger, Episode 1, \emph{Ways of Seeing}, BBC (1972), \url{https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Berger, J. (1972), Episode 1, \emph{Ways of Seeing}, BBC, \url{https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>John Berger, Episode 1, \emph{Ways of Seeing}, BBC (1972), \url{https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Berger, J. (1972), Episode 1, \emph{Ways of Seeing}, BBC, \url{https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @video{berger1972ws, entrysubtype = {episode}, author = {John Berger}, @@ -4646,7 +4830,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, date = {1972}, url = {https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0pDE4VX_9Kk}, urldate = {2013-11-09}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4656,14 +4840,14 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, \tip{Set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{podcast} for a podcast.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.7.3> -%<y><NHR \S18.7.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.7.3> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.7.3\textdagger> {weldon2010did} -%<n>Fay Weldon, interview with Kirsty Young, \emph{Desert Island Discs Archive} [podcast], BBC Radio 4 (9 May 2010), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}. -%<y>Weldon, F. (2010), interview with Kirsty Young, \emph{Desert Island Discs Archive} [podcast], BBC Radio 4 (9 May), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}. +%<n|m>Fay Weldon, interview with Kirsty Young, \emph{Desert Island Discs Archive} [podcast], BBC Radio 4 (9 May 2010), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}. +%<a|y>Weldon, F. (2010), interview with Kirsty Young, \emph{Desert Island Discs Archive} [podcast], BBC Radio 4 (9 May), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @audio{weldon2010did, entrysubtype = {podcast}, author = {Fay Weldon}, @@ -4672,19 +4856,19 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, organization = {BBC Radio 4}, date = {2010-05-09}, url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/series/dida05/all}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5*> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger> {perry2013ifm} -%<n>Grayson Perry, \enquote{I Found Myself in the Art World} [podcast], Reith Lecture, BBC Radio 4 (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Perry, G. (2013), \enquote{I Found Myself in the Art World} [podcast], Reith Lecture, BBC Radio 4 (5 Nov.), \url{http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Grayson Perry, \enquote{I Found Myself in the Art World} [podcast], Reith Lecture, BBC Radio 4 (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Perry, G. (2013), \enquote{I Found Myself in the Art World} [podcast], Reith Lecture, BBC Radio 4 (5 Nov.), \url{http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @audio{perry2013ifm, entrysubtype = {podcast}, author = {Grayson Perry}, @@ -4694,7 +4878,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, organization = {BBC Radio 4}, url = {http://downloads.bbc.co.uk/podcasts/radio4/reith/reith_20131105-0940b.mp3}, urldate = {2013-11-05}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4703,14 +4887,14 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, \tip{As for other online videos, set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{clip} for a video podcast.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5*> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger> {nicholson2011qsm} -%<n>Christie Nicholson, \enquote{A Quirk of Speech May Become a New Vocal Style} [video], \emph{Scientific American} (17 Dec. 2011), \url{http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17}, accessed 4 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Nicholson, C. (2011), \enquote{A Quirk of Speech May Become a New Vocal Style} [video], \emph{Scientific American} (17 Dec.), \url{http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17}, accessed 4 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Christie Nicholson, \enquote{A Quirk of Speech May Become a New Vocal Style} [video], \emph{Scientific American} (17 Dec. 2011), \url{http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17}, accessed 4 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Nicholson, C. (2011), \enquote{A Quirk of Speech May Become a New Vocal Style} [video], \emph{Scientific American} (17 Dec.), \url{http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17}, accessed 4 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @video{nicholson2011qsm, entrysubtype = {clip}, author = {Christie Nicholson}, @@ -4719,7 +4903,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, date = {2011-12-17}, url = {http://www.scientificamerican.com/podcast/episode.cfm?id=a-quirk-of-speech-may-become-a-new-11-12-17}, urldate = {2013-11-04}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4731,14 +4915,14 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, \tip{Set the \code{entrysubtype} to \code{webcast} for a webcast.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5*> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger> {yousafzai2013mwa} -%<n>Malala Yousafzai, \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Malala Yousafzai Addresses Youth Assembly at UN on her 16th Birthday, 12 July 2013} [webcast], UN Web TV (12 July 2013), \url{http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala}, accessed 15 Feb. 2015. -%<y>Yousafzai, M. (2013), \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Malala Yousafzai Addresses Youth Assembly at UN on her 16th Birthday, 12 July 2013} [webcast], UN Web TV, (12 July), \url{http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala}, accessed 15 Feb. 2015. +%<n|m>Malala Yousafzai, \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Malala Yousafzai Addresses Youth Assembly at UN on her 16th Birthday, 12 July 2013} [webcast], UN Web TV (12 July 2013), \url{http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala}, accessed 15 Feb. 2015. +%<a|y>Yousafzai, M. (2013), \enquote{Making a Wish for Action on Global Education: Malala Yousafzai Addresses Youth Assembly at UN on her 16th Birthday, 12 July 2013} [webcast], UN Web TV, (12 July), \url{http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala}, accessed 15 Feb. 2015. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @video{yousafzai2013mwa, entrysubtype = {webcast}, author = {Malala Yousafzai}, @@ -4748,7 +4932,7 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, date = {2013-07-12}, url = {http://webtv.un.org/search/malala-yousafzai-un-youth-assembly/2542094251001?term=malala}, urldate = {2015-02-15}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4758,14 +4942,14 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, \tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {clarkeNDeci} -%<n>M. Clarke, \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery, \url{http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Clarke, M. (n.d.), \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery, \url{http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>M. Clarke, \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery, \url{http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Clarke, M. (n.d.), \enquote{Exports of Coal to the IFS} [poster], Manchester Art Gallery, \url{http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @image{clarkeNDeci, author = {M. Clarke}, title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS}, @@ -4773,26 +4957,26 @@ The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prints all information about the transmission, organization = {Manchester Art Gallery}, url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128}, urldate = {2013-11-05}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {ibwNDcgs} -%<n>\enquote{Christ the Good Shepherd}, stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys, Imaging the Bible in Wales Database, \url{http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884}, accessed 10 Nov. 2013. -%<y>\enquote{Christ the Good Shepherd} (n.d.), stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys, Imaging the Bible in Wales Database, \url{http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884}, accessed 10 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>\enquote{Christ the Good Shepherd}, stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys, Imaging the Bible in Wales Database, \url{http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884}, accessed 10 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>\enquote{Christ the Good Shepherd} (n.d.), stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys, Imaging the Bible in Wales Database, \url{http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884}, accessed 10 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @image{ibwNDcgs, title = {Christ the Good Shepherd}, note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys}, organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database}, url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884}, urldate = {2013-11-10}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4810,14 +4994,14 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi \tip{If the piece is unsigned, put the site name in the \code{author} field.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {bbc2013cgh} -%<n>BBC News, \enquote{Colchester General Hospital: Police Probe Cancer Treatment} (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. -%<y>BBC News (2013), \enquote{Colchester General Hospital: Police Probe Cancer Treatment} (5 Nov.), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>BBC News, \enquote{Colchester General Hospital: Police Probe Cancer Treatment} (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>BBC News (2013), \enquote{Colchester General Hospital: Police Probe Cancer Treatment} (5 Nov.), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{bbc2013cgh, author = {{BBC News}}, title = {Colchester General Hospital}, @@ -4825,7 +5009,7 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi date = {2013-11-05}, url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-england-essex-24819973}, urldate = {2013-11-05}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4834,14 +5018,14 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi and it can get a bit blurry between that and the name of the site itself.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {hooper2013lfs} -%<n>Richard Hooper, \enquote{Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme}, BBC News Magazine (14 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423}, accessed 14 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Hooper, R. (2013), \enquote{Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme}, BBC News Magazine (14 Nov.) \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423}, accessed 14 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Richard Hooper, \enquote{Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme}, BBC News Magazine (14 Nov. 2013), \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423}, accessed 14 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Hooper, R. (2013), \enquote{Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme}, BBC News Magazine (14 Nov.) \url{http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423}, accessed 14 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{hooper2013lfs, author = {Richard Hooper}, title = {Lebanon's Forgotten Space Programme}, @@ -4849,19 +5033,19 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi date = {2013-11-14}, url = {http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/magazine-24735423}, urldate = {2013-11-14}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {tan2013wdt} -%<n>Siu-Lan Tan, \enquote{Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?} [including video], OUPblog (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Tan, S.-L. (2013), \enquote{Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?} [including video], OUPblog (5 Nov.), \url{http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Siu-Lan Tan, \enquote{Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?} [including video], OUPblog (5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Tan, S.-L. (2013), \enquote{Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?} [including video], OUPblog (5 Nov.), \url{http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{tan2013wdt, author = {Siu-Lan Tan}, title = {Why does this Baby Cry when her Mother Sings?}, @@ -4870,19 +5054,19 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi date = {2013-11-05}, url = {http://blog.oup.com/2013/11/why-does-this-baby-cry-when-her-mother-sings-viral-video/}, urldate = {2013-11-09}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {allaby2013fll} -%<n>Michael Allaby, \enquote{Feathers and Lava Lamps}, Oxford Reference (2013), \url{http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Allaby, M. (2013), \enquote{Feathers and Lava Lamps}, Oxford Reference, \url{http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Michael Allaby, \enquote{Feathers and Lava Lamps}, Oxford Reference (2013), \url{http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Allaby, M. (2013), \enquote{Feathers and Lava Lamps}, Oxford Reference, \url{http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{allaby2013fll, author = {Michael Allaby}, title = {Feathers and Lava Lamps}, @@ -4890,29 +5074,30 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi date = {2013}, url = {http://www.oxfordreference.com/page/featherslavalamps}, urldate = {2013-11-09}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \tip{If the site looks more like a traditional journal (e.g.\@ with an ISSN), use the \code{article} entry type instead of \code{online}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {mcewen2013tte} -%<n>Stephen McEwen, \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}}, \emph{The Spectator} (20 May 2013), \url{http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. -%<y>McEwen, S. (2013), \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}}, \emph{The Spectator} (20 May), \url{http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Stephen McEwen, \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}}, \emph{The Spectator} (20 May 2013), \url{http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>McEwen, S. (2013), \enquote{Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}}, \emph{The Spectator} (20 May), \url{http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/}, accessed 9 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @article{mcewen2013tte, author = {Stephen McEwen}, title = {Tan Twan Eng Interview: \enquote{I Have No Alternative but to Write in English}}, journaltitle = {The Spectator}, date = {2013-05-20}, + options = {varissuedate=false}, url = {http://blogs.spectator.co.uk/books/2013/05/tan-twang-eng-interview-i-have-no-alternative-but-to-write-in-english/}, urldate = {2013-11-09}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4920,20 +5105,20 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi \section{Online reference article} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {eb2013gp} -%<n>\enquote{Gunpowder Plot}, \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, \url{http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. -%<y>\enquote{Gunpowder Plot} (n.d.), \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, \url{http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>\enquote{Gunpowder Plot}, \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, \url{http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>\enquote{Gunpowder Plot} (n.d.), \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica}, \url{http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{eb2013gp, title = {Gunpowder Plot}, maintitle = {Encyclopaedia Britannica}, url = {http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/249505/Gunpowder-Plot}, urldate = {2013-11-05}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4943,25 +5128,25 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi it might reflect an opinion on the two resources; or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.} -\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \textsf{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.} +\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {wp2013oup} -%<n>\enquote{Oxford University Press}, Wikipedia (last modified 5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. -%<y>\enquote{Oxford University Press} (2013), Wikipedia (last modified 5 Nov.), \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>\enquote{Oxford University Press}, Wikipedia (last modified 5 Nov. 2013), \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>\enquote{Oxford University Press} (2013), Wikipedia (last modified 5 Nov.), \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{wp2013oup, title = {Oxford University Press}, organization = {Wikipedia}, date = {2013-11-05}, - datetype = {last modified}, + datetype = {modified}, url = {http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxford_University_Press}, urldate = {2013-11-05}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -4971,14 +5156,14 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi \section{Social media} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {obama2013tvd} -%<n>Barack Obama, \enquote{Tomorrow is Veterans Day} [Facebook post] (10 Nov. 2013), \url{https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Obama, B. (2013), \enquote{Tomorrow is Veterans Day} [Facebook post] (10 Nov.), \url{https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Barack Obama, \enquote{Tomorrow is Veterans Day} [Facebook post] (10 Nov. 2013), \url{https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Obama, B. (2013), \enquote{Tomorrow is Veterans Day} [Facebook post] (10 Nov.), \url{https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{obama2013tvd, entrysubtype = {facebook}, author = {Barack Obama}, @@ -4986,19 +5171,19 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi date = {2013-11-10}, url = {https://www.facebook.com/barackobama/photos/a.53081056748.66806.6815841748/10151936988101749/}, urldate = {2013-11-13}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {harvey2013tfm} -%<n>John Harvey, \enquote{\enquote{These are a Few of My Favourite Things}, No.~28} [Facebook post] (13 Nov. 2013), \url{https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Harvey, J. (2013), \enquote{\enquote{These are a Few of My Favourite Things}, No.~28} [Facebook post] (13 Nov.), \url{https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>John Harvey, \enquote{\enquote{These are a Few of My Favourite Things}, No.~28} [Facebook post] (13 Nov. 2013), \url{https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Harvey, J. (2013), \enquote{\enquote{These are a Few of My Favourite Things}, No.~28} [Facebook post] (13 Nov.), \url{https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre}, accessed 13 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{harvey2013tfm, entrysubtype = {facebook}, author = {John Harvey}, @@ -5006,19 +5191,19 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi date = {2013-11-13}, url = {https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=229786530530896&set=a.108896335953250.15125.100004986510149&type=1&theatre}, urldate = {2013-11-13}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5*> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5*> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger> {globe2013otd} -%<n>Shakespeare's Globe, \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempest was performed by King's Men at Whitehall Palace before James I} [Twitter post] (5.48~a.m., 1~Nov. 2013), \url{https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Shakespeare's Globe (2013), \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempest was performed by King's Men at Whitehall Palace before James I} [Twitter post] (5.48~a.m., 1~Nov.), \url{https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Shakespeare's Globe, \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempest was performed by King's Men at Whitehall Palace before James I} [Twitter post] (5.48~a.m., 1~Nov. 2013), \url{https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Shakespeare's Globe (2013), \enquote{On this day in 1611 first production of The Tempest was performed by King's Men at Whitehall Palace before James I} [Twitter post] (5.48~a.m., 1~Nov.), \url{https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385}, accessed 5 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{globe2013otd, entrysubtype = {tweet}, author = {{Shakespeare's Globe}}, @@ -5027,7 +5212,7 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi options = {timefirst}, url = {https://twitter.com/The_Globe/status/396257422928400385}, urldate = {2013-11-05}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5038,7 +5223,7 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi (not in book) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @online{oup2015tweet, author = {{Oxford University Press}}, shortauthor = {OUP}, @@ -5046,40 +5231,40 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi date = {2015-11-16T01:07:00}, url = {https://twitter.com/OxUniPress/status/666180787251843072}, urldate = {2015-12-25}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \section{Software} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {simoga1.1d6} -%<n>Simoga, \emph{Device 6} (version 1.1) [mobile application for iPhone and iPad], downloaded 9 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Simoga (n.d.), \emph{Device 6} (version 1.1) [mobile application for iPhone and iPad], downloaded 9 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>Simoga, \emph{Device 6} (version 1.1) [mobile application for iPhone and iPad], downloaded 9 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Simoga (n.d.), \emph{Device 6} (version 1.1) [mobile application for iPhone and iPad], downloaded 9 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @software{simoga1.1d6, author = {Simoga}, title = {Device 6}, version = {1.1}, titleaddon = {mobile application for iPhone and iPad}, urldate = {2013-11-09}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {eliot1.1.1twl} -%<n>T. S. Eliot, \emph{The Waste Land} (version 1.1.1) [mobile application for iPad] (London: Touch Press, 2013), downloaded 9 Nov. 2013. -%<y>Eliot, T. S. (2013), \emph{The Waste Land} (version 1.1.1) [mobile application for iPad] (London: Touch Press), downloaded 9 Nov. 2013. +%<n|m>T. S. Eliot, \emph{The Waste Land} (version 1.1.1) [mobile application for iPad] (London: Touch Press, 2013), downloaded 9 Nov. 2013. +%<a|y>Eliot, T. S. (2013), \emph{The Waste Land} (version 1.1.1) [mobile application for iPad] (London: Touch Press), downloaded 9 Nov. 2013. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @software{eliot1.1.1twl, author = {T. S. Eliot}, title = {The Waste Land}, @@ -5089,7 +5274,7 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi publisher = {Touch Press}, date = {2013}, urldate = {2013-11-09}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5097,14 +5282,14 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi \section{Database} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S18.8.5> -%<y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5> +%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger> {un2011wpp} -%<n>United Nations, \emph{World Population Prospects: The 2010 Revision} [CD-ROM] (New York: United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division, 2011). -%<y>United Nations (2011), \emph{World Population Prospects: The 2010 Revision} [CD-ROM] (New York: United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division). +%<n|m>United Nations, \emph{World Population Prospects: The 2010 Revision} [CD-ROM] (New York: United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division, 2011). +%<a|y>United Nations (2011), \emph{World Population Prospects: The 2010 Revision} [CD-ROM] (New York: United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @dataset{un2011wpp, author = {{United Nations}}, title = {World Population Prospects}, @@ -5113,7 +5298,7 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi location = {New York}, publisher = {{United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Population Division}}, date = {2011}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5121,10 +5306,10 @@ Standard \textsf{biblatex} only provides for one title for online resources, whi \chapter{Legal references}\label{sec:legal} \chapterprecis{commentary, jurisdiction, legal, legislation} -\textsf{Oxref} provides only a basic level of support for legal references, in case you need to use some in a mainly non-legal text. +\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} provides only a basic level of support for legal references, in case you need to use some in a mainly non-legal text. For a more thorough and robust treatment, intended for a specialist readership, I recommend you use the \href{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/oscola}{\textsf{oscola}} style instead. -Since there is a family resemblence between the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style\slash New Hart's Rules} and the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}, \textsf{oxref} largely mimics \textsf{oscola} and its data model, though there are some small formatting differences. What you should \emph{not} expect from \textsf{oxref} are facilities for compiling specialist indices of sources, or anything special regarding the handling of postnotes. +Since there is a family resemblence between the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style\slash New Hart's Rules} and the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} largely mimics \textsf{oscola} and its data model, though there are some small formatting differences. What you should \emph{not} expect from \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} are facilities for compiling specialist indices of sources, or anything special regarding the handling of postnotes. %<y>Since legal references are usually cited using footnotes, how \textsf{oxyear} should behave is not well defined. As a result, I have not configured it to do anything fancy: the full reference will be formatted just the same as with \textsf{oxnotes}, and citations will typically be title–year using parentheses in the usual way. I am open to suggestions for how to handle things better. @@ -5184,6 +5369,11 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. \cite[78-79]{ridge1964} \end{egcite} %</n> +%<*m|a> +\begin{egcite}{} +\textcite[78-79]{ridge1964} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> \begin{egcite}{(\emph{Ridge v Baldwin} 1964: 78–9)} \parencite[78-79]{ridge1964} @@ -5191,21 +5381,21 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. %</y> \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S13.4.1> -%<y><NHR \S13.4.1\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S13.4.1> +%<a|y><NHR \S13.4.1\textdagger> {ridge1964} -%<n>\emph{Ridge v Baldwin} [1964] AC 40 -%<y>\emph{Ridge v Baldwin} [1964] AC 40 +%<n|m>\emph{Ridge v Baldwin} [1964] AC 40 +%<a|y>\emph{Ridge v Baldwin} [1964] AC 40 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{ridge1964, title = {Ridge v. Baldwin}, keywords = {gb}, date = {1964}, journaltitle = {A.C.}, pages = {40}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5218,7 +5408,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. \emph{R v Lambert} [2001] 2 WLR 211 (QBD) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{lambert2001, title = {R v Lambert}, keywords = {gb}, @@ -5228,7 +5418,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. pages = {211}, institution = {QBD}, options = {year-essential=true}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5238,7 +5428,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. \emph{Badische v Soda-Fabrics} (1897) 14 RPC 919 (HL) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{badische1897, title = {Badische v. Soda-Fabrics}, date = {1897}, @@ -5246,7 +5436,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. volume = {14}, pages = {919}, institution = {HL}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5258,7 +5448,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. \emph{R v G} [2003] UKHL 50, [2004] 1 AC 1034 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{rvg2004, title = {R. v. G.}, number = {[2003] UKHL 50}, @@ -5268,7 +5458,7 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. pages = {1034}, options = {year-essential}, pagination = {[]}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5277,6 +5467,11 @@ Use the \code{jurisdiction} entry type for citing cases. Test\footcite[13]{rvg2004} \end{egcite} %</n> +%<*m|a> +\begin{egcite}{} +\textcite[13]{rvg2004} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> \begin{egcite}{} \parencite[13]{rvg2004} @@ -5291,7 +5486,7 @@ Test\footcite[13]{rvg2004} \emph{Smith v Jones} [2001] (1948) 2 All ER 431 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{smith2001, title = {Smith v Jones}, date = {2001}, @@ -5300,11 +5495,11 @@ Test\footcite[13]{rvg2004} volume = {2}, pages = {431}, options = {year-essential}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsistent on whether the court of decision should be printed plain or in parentheses at the end of a reference to a reported case. The default chosen by \textsf{oxref} is to use parentheses as per the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}. +Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsistent on whether the court of decision should be printed plain or in parentheses at the end of a reference to a reported case. The default chosen by \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} is to use parentheses as per the \emph{Oxford Standard for the Citation of Legal Authorities}. \tip{To print the court of decision plain, you can use the \key{court-plain} option. You can set this globally at the style level or on a per-entry basis.} @@ -5314,7 +5509,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste \emph{Bowman v Fussy} [1978] RPC 545, HL \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{bowman1978, title = {Bowman v Fussy}, keywords = {gb}, @@ -5323,7 +5518,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste pages = {545}, institution = {HL}, options = {court-plain}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5333,14 +5528,14 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste \emph{Hughes v Stewart}, 1907 SC 791 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{hughes1907, title = {Hughes v. Stewart}, date = {1907}, reporter = {SC}, pages = {791}, keywords = {sc}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5350,14 +5545,14 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste \emph{Corcoran v HM Advocate}, 1932 JC 42 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{corcoran1932, title = {Corcoran v. H.M. Advocate}, date = {1932}, reporter = {JC}, pages = {42}, keywords = {sc}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5367,7 +5562,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste \emph{Michael v Johnson}, 426 US 346 (1976) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{michael1976, title = {Michael v. Johnson}, volume = {426}, @@ -5375,7 +5570,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste pages = {346}, date = {1976}, keywords = {us}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5390,13 +5585,13 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste \emph{Powick v Malvern Wells Water Co}, The Times, 28 Sept.\@ 1993 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{powick1993, entrysubtype = {newspaper}, title = {Powick v. Malvern Wells Water Co}, date = {1993-09-28}, journaltitle = {The Times}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5406,12 +5601,12 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste \emph{R v Marianishi, ex p London Borough of Camden} (CA, 13 Apr.\@ 1965) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{marianishi1965, title = {R v Marianishi, ex p London Borough of Camden}, date = {1965-04-13}, institution = {C.A.}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5430,7 +5625,7 @@ Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} are inconsiste Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] ECR I–10889 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{C118/07, keywords = {eu}, title = {Commission of the European Communities v. Finland}, @@ -5440,7 +5635,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E volume = {I}, pages = {10889}, date = {2002}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5454,7 +5649,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E \emph{Alcatel/Telettra} (Case IV/M042) [1991] OJ L122/48, [1991] 4 CLMR 391 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{alcatel, keywords = {eu}, title = {Alcatel/Telettra}, @@ -5466,7 +5661,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E volume = {122}, pages = {48}, note = {[1991] 4 CLMR 391}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5478,7 +5673,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E \emph{Young, James and Webster v UK} (App no 7601/76) (1982) 4 EHRR 38 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{young1982, title = {Young, James and Webster v. UK}, number = {7601/76}, @@ -5487,7 +5682,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E date = {1982}, pages = {38}, keywords = {echr}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5499,7 +5694,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E \emph{Plattform \enquote{Artze für das Leben} v Austria} (App no 10126/82) (1988) Series A no 139 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{plattform1988, title = {Plattform \enquote{Artze für das Leben} v. Austria}, number = {10126/82}, @@ -5507,7 +5702,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E date = {1988}, pages = {139}, keywords = {echr}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5517,7 +5712,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E \emph{Osman v UK} (App no 23452/94) ECHR 1998–VIII 3124 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @jurisdiction{osman1998, title = {Osman v UK}, number = {23452/94}, @@ -5527,7 +5722,7 @@ Case C–118/07 \emph{Commission of the European Communities v Finland} [2002] E pages = {3124}, institution = {ECtHR}, keywords = {echr}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5546,7 +5741,7 @@ Use the \code{legislation} entry type for citing Acts, Bills, Orders, Measures, Factory and Workshop Act 1891 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legislation{fwa1891, entrysubtype = {primary}, title = {Factory and Workshop Act}, @@ -5555,7 +5750,7 @@ Factory and Workshop Act 1891 pagination = {section}, keywords = {en}, number = {54 \& 55 Vict, c. 75}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5568,14 +5763,14 @@ Factory and Workshop Act 1891 Local Authority Precepts Order 1897, SR~\&~O 1897/201 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legislation{lap1897, entrysubtype = {secondary}, title = {Local Authority Precepts Order}, date = {1897}, number = {SR~\&~O 1897\slash 201}, pagination = {rule}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5585,14 +5780,14 @@ Local Authority Precepts Order 1897, SR~\&~O 1897/201 Community Charge Support Grant (Abolition) Order 1987, SI 1987/466 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legislation{ccsga1987, entrysubtype = {secondary}, title = {Community Charge Support Grant (Abolition) Order}, date = {1987}, number = {SI 1987\slash 466}, pagination = {regulation}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5609,6 +5804,11 @@ you can provide an even sparser reference for primary European legislation. \cite[\pno~3b]{ECT:Rome} \end{egcite} %</n> +%<*m|a> +\begin{egcite}{} +\textcite[\pno~3b]{ECT:Rome} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> \begin{egcite}{} \parencite[\pno~3b]{ECT:Rome} @@ -5622,15 +5822,15 @@ you can provide an even sparser reference for primary European legislation. EC Treaty \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legislation{ECT:Rome, entrysubtype = {eu-treaty}, title = {EC Treaty}, - shorthandintro = {Treaty of Rome, as amended}, - shorthand = {EC Treaty}, +%<!m|a|y> shorthandintro = {Treaty of Rome, as amended}, +%<!m|a> shorthand = {EC Treaty}, pagination = {article}, keywords = {eu}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5644,7 +5844,7 @@ Secondary legislation should always have a full reference. Council Directive (EC) 97/1 on banking practice [1997] OJ L234/3 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legislation{EC:97/1, title = {Council Directive (EC) 97/1 on banking practice}, date = {1997}, @@ -5654,7 +5854,7 @@ Council Directive (EC) 97/1 on banking practice [1997] OJ L234/3 pages = {3}, pagination = {article}, keywords = {eu}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5664,7 +5864,7 @@ Council Directive (EC) 97/1 on banking practice [1997] OJ L234/3 Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport [1968] OJ Spec Ed 302 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legislation{EEC:1017/68, title = {Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport}, date = {1968}, @@ -5672,11 +5872,11 @@ Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport [196 pages = {302}, pagination = {article}, keywords = {eu}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} -\tip{Add amendment notices to the \code{note} field; \textsf{oxref} does not, sadly, provide a clever way of constructing these from their component parts so you have to write them verbatim.} +\tip{Add amendment notices to the \code{note} field; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not, sadly, provide a clever way of constructing these from their component parts so you have to write them verbatim.} \begin{bibexbox} <NHR \S13.5.2> @@ -5684,7 +5884,7 @@ Council Regulation (EEC) 1017/68 applying rules of competition to transport [196 Commission Notice on agreements of minor importance [1986] OJ C231/2, as amended [1994] OJ C368/20 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legislation{ECN:1986, title = {Commission Notice on agreements of minor importance}, date = {1986}, @@ -5694,7 +5894,7 @@ Commission Notice on agreements of minor importance [1986] OJ C231/2, as amended pages = {2}, note = {as amended [1994] OJ C368/20}, keywords = {eu}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5711,17 +5911,17 @@ Treaties use the \code{legal} entry type, with \code{piltreaty} as the \code{ent Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees (adopted 28 July 1951, entered into force 22 Apr.\@ 1954) 189 UNTS 137 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legal{refugees, entrysubtype = {piltreaty}, title = {Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees}, - shorthand = {Refugee Convention}, +%<!m|a> shorthand = {Refugee Convention}, execution = {adopted=1951-07-28 and inforce=1954-04-22}, pagination = {article}, volume = {189}, journaltitle = {UNTS}, pages = {137}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5748,7 +5948,7 @@ References to Hansard use the \code{legal} entry type, with \code{parliamentary} Hansard, HC vol.\@ 357, cols.\@ 234–45 (13 Apr.\@ 1965) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legal{hc357, entrysubtype = {parliamentary}, title = {Hansard}, @@ -5757,7 +5957,7 @@ Hansard, HC vol.\@ 357, cols.\@ 234–45 (13 Apr.\@ 1965) pages = {234-245}, date = {1965-04-13}, bookpagination = {column}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5769,7 +5969,7 @@ Hansard, HC vol.\@ 357, cols.\@ 234–45 (13 Apr.\@ 1965) Parl.\@ Deb.\@ (series 4) vol.\@ 24, col.\@ 234 (24 Mar.\@ 1895) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @legal{pd4/24, entrysubtype = {parliamentary}, title = {Parl. Deb.}, @@ -5778,7 +5978,7 @@ Parl.\@ Deb.\@ (series 4) vol.\@ 24, col.\@ 234 (24 Mar.\@ 1895) pages = {234}, date = {1895-03-24}, bookpagination = {column}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5790,14 +5990,14 @@ Reports of Parliamentary select committees and the Law Commission should be ente \tip{To print the identifying codes within the publication block, put them all in \code{number}; do not specify a \code{type} or \code{series}.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR \S13.7.2> -%<y><NHR \S13.7.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR \S13.7.2> +%<a|y><NHR \S13.7.2\textdagger> {lc2009icl} -%<n>Law Commission, \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm 7526, 2009) para 1.15 -%<y>Law Commission (2009), \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm 7526) para 1.15 +%<n|m>Law Commission, \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm 7526, 2009) para 1.15 +%<a|y>Law Commission (2009), \emph{Intoxication and Criminal Liability} (Law Comm No 314, Cm 7526) para 1.15 \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @report{lc2009icl, entrysubtype = {legal}, author = {{Law Commission}}, @@ -5806,14 +6006,14 @@ Reports of Parliamentary select committees and the Law Commission should be ente date = {2009}, pages = {1.15}, bookpagination = {paragraph}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \section{Commentaries} -\textsf{Oxref} does not provide any special formatting for legal commentaries; +\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not provide any special formatting for legal commentaries; it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}. @@ -5829,14 +6029,14 @@ it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}. use the \code{misc} entry type for the poem, with a relation of type \code{in} pointing to the containing work.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.8> -%<y><OGS \S15.8\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.8> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.8\textdagger> {auden1990era} -%<n>W. H. Auden, \enquote{Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände} [\emph{sic}], in \enquote{The German Auden: Six Early Poems}, trans. David Constantine, in Katherine Bucknell and Nicholas Jenkins (eds.), \emph{W. H. Auden, \enquote{The Map of All my Youth}: Early Works, Friends, and Influences} (Auden Studies, 1; Oxford, 1990), 1--15 at 6. -%<y>Auden, W. H. (n.d.), \enquote{Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände} [\emph{sic}], in \enquote{The German Auden: Six Early Poems}, trans. D. Constantine, in K. Bucknell and N. Jenkins (eds.), \emph{W. H. Auden, \enquote{The Map of All my Youth}: Early Works, Friends, and Influences} (Auden Studies, 1; Oxford, 1990), 1--15 at 6. +%<n|m>W. H. Auden, \enquote{Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände} [\emph{sic}], in \enquote{The German Auden: Six Early Poems}, trans. David Constantine, in Katherine Bucknell and Nicholas Jenkins (eds.), \emph{W. H. Auden, \enquote{The Map of All my Youth}: Early Works, Friends, and Influences} (Auden Studies, 1; Oxford, 1990), 1--15 at 6. +%<a|y>Auden, W. H. (n.d.), \enquote{Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände} [\emph{sic}], in \enquote{The German Auden: Six Early Poems}, trans. D. Constantine, in K. Bucknell and N. Jenkins (eds.), \emph{W. H. Auden, \enquote{The Map of All my Youth}: Early Works, Friends, and Influences} (Auden Studies, 1; Oxford, 1990), 1--15 at 6. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @misc{auden1990era, author = {W. H. Auden}, title = {Es regnet auf mir in den Schottische Lände}, @@ -5858,20 +6058,20 @@ it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}. location = {Oxford}, date = {1990}, pages = {1-15}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.8> -%<y><OGS \S15.8\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.8> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.8\textdagger> {blois1993qff} -%<n>William of Blois, \enquote{The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly} (\emph{Pulicis et musce iurgia}), trans. in Jan M. Ziolkowski, \emph{Talking Animals: Medieval Latin Beast Poetry, 750-1150} (Middle Ages Series, ed. Edward Peters; Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1993), 274--8. -%<y>William of Blois (n.d.), \enquote{The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly} (\emph{Pulicis et musce iurgia}), trans. in Ziolkowski, J. M., \emph{Talking Animals: Medieval Latin Beast Poetry, 750-1150} (Middle Ages Series, ed. E. Peters; Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1993), 274--8. +%<n|m>William of Blois, \enquote{The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly} (\emph{Pulicis et musce iurgia}), trans. in Jan M. Ziolkowski, \emph{Talking Animals: Medieval Latin Beast Poetry, 750-1150} (Middle Ages Series, ed. Edward Peters; Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1993), 274--8. +%<a|y>William of Blois (n.d.), \enquote{The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly} (\emph{Pulicis et musce iurgia}), trans. in Ziolkowski, J. M., \emph{Talking Animals: Medieval Latin Beast Poetry, 750-1150} (Middle Ages Series, ed. E. Peters; Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1993), 274--8. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @misc{blois1993qff, author = {{William of Blois}}, title = {The Quarrel of the Flea and the Fly}, @@ -5889,7 +6089,7 @@ it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}. location = {Philadelphia}, publisher = {University of Pennsylvania Press}, date = {1993}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5900,7 +6100,7 @@ If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted \tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the poem is published on its own, and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{poem} if the poem is published in an anthology.} -\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \textsf{oxref} provides the additional pagination types +\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types \code{book}, \code{canto}, and \code{stanza} (\code{line} is already defined), though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.} @@ -5909,6 +6109,11 @@ If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted \cite[\pno~ii, canto vi, stanza iii]{spenser1965fq} \end{egcite} %</n> +%<*m|a> +\begin{egcite}{} +\textcite[\pno~ii, canto vi, stanza iii]{spenser1965fq} +\end{egcite} +%</m|a> %<*y> \begin{egcite}{} \parencite[\pno~ii, canto vi, stanza iii]{spenser1965fq} @@ -5916,15 +6121,14 @@ If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted %</y> \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><OGS \S15.8*> -%<y><OGS \S15.8*\textdagger> +%<n|m><OGS \S15.8*> +%<a|y><OGS \S15.8*\textdagger> {spenser1965fq}% -%<n>Edmund Spenser, \emph{The Faerie Queene} (Everyman's Library, 443–4; London: Dent, 1965–6) (originally pub. 1590–6). -%<y>Spenser, E. (1590–6), \emph{The Faerie Queene} (Everyman's Library, 443–4; London: Dent, 1965–6). -%<y> +%<n|m>Edmund Spenser, \emph{The Faerie Queene} (Everyman's Library, 443–4; London: Dent, 1965–6) (originally pub. 1590–6). +%<a|y>Spenser, E. (1590–6), \emph{The Faerie Queene} (Everyman's Library, 443–4; London: Dent, 1965–6). \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @book{spenser1965fq, author = {Edmund Spenser}, title = {The Faerie Queene}, @@ -5936,7 +6140,7 @@ If a poem is divided into cantos, the title is set in italics rather than quoted date = {1965/1966}, origdate = {1590/1596}, pagination = {book}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -5948,7 +6152,7 @@ Play titles, like those of epic poems, are set in italics rather than quoted. \tip{To achieve this, use the entry type \code{book} if the play is published on its own, and \code{bookinbook} with entry subtype \code{play} if the play is published in an anthology.} -\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \textsf{oxref} provides the additional pagination types +\tip{To assist with quoting passages, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} provides the additional pagination types \code{act} and \code{scene} (\code{line} is already defined), though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.} @@ -5959,12 +6163,12 @@ An author–date system like \textsf{oxyear} does not really lend itself to manu but support is provided anyway for the sake of completeness. %</y> -%<n>\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.} -%<y>\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.} +%<n|m>\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.} +%<a|y>\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.} -With \textsf{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type. +With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type. -\tip{If the manuscript has a descriptor but no title, put the descriptor in the \code{title} field and annotate the field with the term \enquote{\code{descriptor}}. If you want to supply both a title and a descriptor, put the descriptor in the \code{note} field. Alternatively, you can use the (\textsf{oxref}-specific) \code{descriptor} field, and \textsf{oxref} will handle all this for you.} +\tip{If the manuscript has a descriptor but no title, put the descriptor in the \code{title} field and annotate the field with the term \enquote{\code{descriptor}}. If you want to supply both a title and a descriptor, put the descriptor in the \code{note} field. Alternatively, you can use the (\pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific) \code{descriptor} field, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will handle all this for you.} \tip{Use \code{author} and \code{date} as normal. Note that the \code{date} will not be printed if both the \code{author} and \code{title}\slash \code{descriptor} fields are left blank.} @@ -5977,14 +6181,14 @@ With \textsf{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first \tip{You can use the \code{folio} key in the \code{pagination} and \code{bookpagination} fields.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR 18.6.3*> -%<y><NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR 18.6.3*> +%<a|y><NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger> {smithMS23116} -%<n>Francis Smith, travel diaries, 1912–7, British Library, Add. MS 23116. -%<y>Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116. +%<n|m>Francis Smith, travel diaries, 1912–7, British Library, Add. MS 23116. +%<a|y>Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @unpublished{smithMS23116, author = {Francis Smith}, descriptor = {travel diaries}, @@ -5992,12 +6196,12 @@ With \textsf{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first library = {British Library}, series = {Add. MS}, number = {23116}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}. -\textsf{Oxref} does not have all the bells and whistles of that style, but it understands a subset of its data model. +\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} does not have all the bells and whistles of that style, but it understands a subset of its data model. \tip{You can use \code{author}, \code{title}\slash \code{note}\slash \code{descriptor} and \code{date} as described above. (This is a departure from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}.)} @@ -6016,70 +6220,70 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex \tip{You can specify the writing support material in the \code{support} field. Three special keys – \code{papyrus}, \code{paper}, and \code{pergament} – are recognized and (potentially) translated, but other values will be printed as-is.} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR 18.6.2> -%<y><NHR 18.6.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR 18.6.2> +%<a|y><NHR 18.6.2\textdagger> {chaundlerMS288} -%<n>Thomas Chaundler, \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288. -%<y>Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288. +%<n|m>Thomas Chaundler, \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288. +%<a|y>Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @manuscript{chaundlerMS288, author = {Thomas Chaundler}, title = {Collocutiones}, library = {Balliol College}, location = {Oxford}, shelfmark = {MS288}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR 18.6.2> -%<y><NHR 18.6.2\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR 18.6.2> +%<a|y><NHR 18.6.2\textdagger> {exchequerE311} -%<n>exchequer accounts, Dec. 1798, Cheshire Record Office, E311. -%<y>exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311. +%<n|m>exchequer accounts, Dec. 1798, Cheshire Record Office, E311. +%<a|y>exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @manuscript{exchequerE311, descriptor = {exchequer accounts}, date = {1798-12}, library = {Cheshire Record Office}, shelfmark = {E311}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR 18.6.3> -%<y><NHR 18.6.3\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR 18.6.3> +%<a|y><NHR 18.6.3\textdagger> {blcBOX19d} -%<n>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes, 12 June 1949, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d. -%<y>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d. +%<n|m>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes, 12 June 1949, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d. +%<a|y>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @manuscript{blcBOX19d, title = {Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes}, title+an = {=descriptor}, date = {1949-06-12}, library = {Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries}, shelfmark = {box 19/d}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} \begin{bibexbox} -%<n><NHR 18.6.5> -%<y><NHR 18.6.5\textdagger> +%<n|m><NHR 18.6.5> +%<a|y><NHR 18.6.5\textdagger> {bodMSrawl-d520} -%<n>Bodleian Library, Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7. -%<y>Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7. +%<n|m>Bodleian Library, Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7. +%<a|y>Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7. \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @manuscript{bodMSrawl-d520, library = {Bodleian Library}, location = {Oxford}, @@ -6087,7 +6291,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex shelfmark = {520}, pages = {7}, bookpagination = {folio}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -6096,7 +6300,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex (not in book) \tcblower \begin{Verbatim} -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> @manuscript{cantabAGM4429, library = {University Library}, location = {Cambridge}, @@ -6109,7 +6313,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex pages = {11\recto-11\verso}, layer = {inf}, bookpagination = {folio}} -%<*n|y> +%<*n|m|a|y> \end{Verbatim} \end{bibexbox} @@ -6122,7 +6326,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex %</y> \printbibliography[notcategory=hidden] -%</n|y> +%</n|m|a|y> %</doc|bib> %<*driver> \fi @@ -6163,13 +6367,11 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex \RequirePackage{graphicx} % \end{macrocode} % -% Language support may be widened in future, but for now we support the -% following: +% Language support may be widened in future, but for now we support British and +% American English. Adapted language files have the following suffix. % % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareLanguageMapping{english}{british-oxref} -\DeclareLanguageMapping{british}{british-oxref} -\DeclareLanguageMapping{american}{american-oxref} +\DeclareLanguageMappingSuffix{-oxref} % \end{macrocode} % % We provide some additional bibliography strings: @@ -6214,6 +6416,10 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex % \begin{macrocode} book, books, canto, cantos, stanza, stanzas, act, acts, scene, scenes, folio, folios, article, articles, clause, clauses, regulation, regulations, rule, rules, + booktotal, booktotals, cantototal, cantototals, stanzatotal, stanzatotals, + acttotal, acttotals, scenetotal, scenetotals, foliototal, foliototals, + articletotal, articletotals, clausetotal, clausetotals, regulationtotal, + regulationtotals, ruletotal, ruletotals, % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{itemize} @@ -6229,7 +6435,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex % \end{itemize} % % \begin{macrocode} - nolocation, recorded, uploaded, + nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded, % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{itemize} @@ -6262,7 +6468,8 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex % \end{macrocode} % % Here are the new default punctuation conventions. The new \cs{relatedtypepunct} -% is for before the |relatedtype| localization string. +% is for before the |relatedtype| localization string, while \cs{recordseriespunct} +% is used for audiovisual resources. % % \begin{macrocode} \renewcommand*{\labelnamepunct}{\addcomma\space} @@ -6270,10 +6477,13 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex \renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\space} \renewcommand*{\intitlepunct}{\nopunct\space} \renewcommand*{\bibnamedash}{\resizebox{2em}{\height}{\textemdash}\addthinspace} -\renewcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{\addcomma} \newcommand*{\recordseriespunct}{\addcomma\space} \newcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\addsemicolon\space} \renewcommand*{\relateddelim}{\addsemicolon\space} +\DeclareDelimFormat{revsdnamedelim}{\addcomma} +\DeclareDelimFormat{authortypedelim}{\addspace} +\DeclareDelimFormat{editortypedelim}{\addspace} +\DeclareDelimFormat{translatortypedelim}{\addspace} % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection{Names} @@ -6344,20 +6554,28 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% \mkbibnamefamily{#1}\isdot \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\ifnumeral{#4}{}{\addcomma}\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}% - \ifdefvoid{#5}{}{\ifgiveninits{}{\mkbibnametitle{#5}\isdot\bibnamedelimd}}% - \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{#2}\isdot}% + \ifboolexpe{% + (test {\ifdefvoid{#5}} or not togl {blx@ox@nametitle}) + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}% + }{}{% + \revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#5}{}{\iftoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnametitle{#5}\isdot}{}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{#2}\isdot}% }{% \usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% \mkbibnamefamily{#1}\isdot \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}% \ifboolexpe{% + (test {\ifdefvoid{#5}} or not togl {blx@ox@nametitle}) + and test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} and test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}% }{}{% \revsdnamepunct}% - \ifdefvoid{#5}{}{\iftoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{\mkbibnametitle{#5}\isdot\bibnamedelimd}{}}% + \ifdefvoid{#5}{}{\iftoggle{blx@ox@nametitle}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnametitle{#5}\isdot}{}}% \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{#2}\isdot}% \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}}} % \end{macrocode} @@ -6630,7 +6848,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex \ifnumgreater{\c@minnames}{1}{% \finalandcomma }{}% - \andothersdelim\bibstring{andothers}% + \printdelim{andothersdelim}\bibstring{andothers}% }{}% \restorebibmacro{name:andothers}% } @@ -6813,7 +7031,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex {} {\setunit{\addspace}% \printfield{nameaddon}}% - \setunit{\addspace}}% + \setunit{\printdelim{authortypedelim}}}% \iffieldundef{authortype} {} {\usebibmacro{authorstrg}% @@ -6824,8 +7042,8 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex % % Following |authortitle| and |authoryear|, we redefine the |editor| and % |editor+others| macros to use a common |bbx:editor| macro. The macro -% we use is the same as the usual one except the editor type is set off -% using parentheses instead of a comma. +% we use is the similar to the normal one except we delegate printing editor +% names to |editor+alteditor|, and we don't yet add the year label. % % \begin{macrocode} \renewbibmacro*{editor}{% @@ -6841,7 +7059,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck} {\bibnamedash} {\usebibmacro{editor+alteditor}% - \setunit{\addspace}% + \setunit{\printdelim{editortypedelim}}% \usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}}% \usebibmacro{#1}% \clearname{editor}} @@ -6865,7 +7083,7 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck} {\bibnamedash} {\printnames{translator}% - \setunit{\addspace}% + \setunit{\printdelim{translatortypedelim}}% \usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}}% \usebibmacro{#1}% \clearname{translator}% @@ -7005,10 +7223,24 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex } % \end{macrocode} % -% We patch the truncated date formats from |biblatex.sty| to use the +% We patch the date range formats from |biblatex.sty| to use the % above function. % % \begin{macrocode} +\patchcmd{\mkdaterangefull}{% + \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% +}{% + \iffieldundef{#2endmonth}% + {\blx@ox@compyear{\thefield{#2year}}{\thefield{#2endyear}}}% + {\csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}}% +}{}{} +\patchcmd{\mkdaterangefullextra}{% + \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% +}{% + \iffieldundef{#2endmonth}% + {\blx@ox@compyear{\thefield{#2year}}{\thefield{#2endyear}}}% + {\csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}}% +}{}{} \patchcmd{\mkdaterangetrunc}{% \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% }{% @@ -7041,6 +7273,8 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex \ifboolexpr{ test {\iffieldundef{year}} and + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and test {\iffieldundef{month}} and test {\iffieldundef{hour}} @@ -7065,20 +7299,17 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex \DeclareFieldFormat{origdatetype}{% \ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1\isdot}% } -\newbibmacro*{origdate+time}[1][]{% +\newbibmacro*{origdate+time}{% \ifboolexpr{ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}} and + test {\iffieldundef{origseason}} + and test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}} and test {\iffieldundef{orighour}} }{}{% - \ifstrempty{#1}{% - \printfield{origdatetype}% - }{% - \iffieldundef{origdatetype}% - {\bibstring{#1}}% - {\printfield{origdatetype}}}}% + \printfield{origdatetype}}% \setunit*{\addspace}% \iftoggle{blx@ox@timefirst}{% \printorigtime @@ -7455,6 +7686,8 @@ The second uses the dedicated \code{manuscript} entry type from \textsf{biblatex and test {\iffieldundef{year}} and + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and test {\iffieldundef{month}} }{}{% \ifboolexpr{ @@ -7769,6 +8002,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% and test {\iffieldundef{year}} and + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and test {\iffieldundef{month}} }{}{% \nopunct @@ -7800,6 +8035,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% and test {\iffieldundef{year}} and + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and test {\iffieldundef{month}} }{}{% \nopunct @@ -8586,6 +8823,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% and test {\iffieldundef{year}} and + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and test {\iffieldundef{month}} }{}{% \nopunct @@ -8628,6 +8867,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% and test {\iffieldundef{year}} and + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and test {\iffieldundef{month}} }{}{% \nopunct @@ -8674,6 +8915,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% and test {\iffieldundef{year}} and + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and test {\iffieldundef{month}} }{}{% \nopunct @@ -8829,7 +9072,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \newbibmacro*{publisher+type+series+number+date}{% \iffieldundef{number}{}{% \setunit{\addcomma\space}% - \usebibmacro{origdate+time}[recorded]% + \usebibmacro{origdate+time}% }% \ifboolexpr{% test {\iflistundef{origpublisher}} @@ -8846,10 +9089,14 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% and test {\iffieldundef{year}} and + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and test {\iffieldundef{month}} and test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}} and + test {\iffieldundef{eventseason}} + and test {\iffieldundef{eventmonth}} and test {\iffieldundef{hour}} @@ -8875,7 +9122,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \printfield{number}% \iffieldundef{number}{% \setunit{\addcomma\space}% - \usebibmacro{origdate+time}[recorded]% + \usebibmacro{origdate+time}% }{}% \setunit{\addcomma\space}% \usebibmacro{date+time}}}} @@ -10279,8 +10526,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % \begin{macrocode} \def\recto{r} \def\verso{v} -\NumCheckSetup{\def\recto{r}\def\verso{v}} -\DeclareNumChars*{rv} +\NumCheckSetup{\def\recto{}\def\verso{}} % \end{macrocode} % % Here are some special field formats for the |manuscript| driver. @@ -10602,7 +10848,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % \subsubsection{Reprints} % % The standard styles define a special driver for the |reprintfrom| relation. -% For \textsf{oxref}, the standard generic driver is sufficient, so this code +% For \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, the standard generic driver is sufficient, so this code % reverts the specialization. % % \begin{macrocode} @@ -10625,8 +10871,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% }{}}% \renewbibmacro*{related:init}{}% \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% - \ifbibmacroundef{date+extrayear}{}{% - \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{}% + \ifbibmacroundef{date+extradate}{}{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{}% \renewbibmacro*{date}{\printdate}}% \renewbibmacro*{pageref}{}% }{% @@ -10685,7 +10931,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % in order to handle reviews. Compared to the default code, this is % simpler in that we don't check for repeated authors\slash editors (it % would be a rather biased review!), we directly set the author format, -% and we don't nullify the \code{date+extrayear} macro. +% and we don't nullify the \code{date+extradate} macro. % % \begin{macrocode} \newbibmacro*{related:reviewof}[1]{% @@ -10754,7 +11000,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareFieldFormat{related:multivolume}{#1} -\newbibmacro*{related:multivolume}[1]{% +\renewbibmacro*{related:multivolume}[1]{% \entrydata*{#1}{% \printtext{% \printfield{volume}% @@ -10789,7 +11035,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \printfield{volumes}% \newunit \usebibmacro{series+number+publisher+location+date}}} -\newbibmacro*{related:bytranslator}[1]{% +\renewbibmacro*{related:bytranslator}[1]{% \entrydata{#1}{% \renewbibmacro*{name:hook}[1]{% \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1} @@ -10820,8 +11066,8 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \ifnumequal{\value{blx@ox@relitem}}{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}% {\bibstring{and}\addspace}{}% \entrydata{#1}{% - \ifbibmacroundef{date+extrayear}{}{% - \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{}}% + \ifbibmacroundef{date+extradate}{}{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{}}% \usebibmacro{author}% \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock \usebibmacro{title}}} @@ -10858,9 +11104,9 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% {}}% \renewbibmacro*{related:init}{}% \DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% - \ifbibmacroundef{date+extrayear} + \ifbibmacroundef{date+extradate} {} - {\renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{}% + {\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{}% \renewbibmacro*{date}{\printdate}}% \renewbibmacro*{pageref}{}} {\thefield{entrytype}}% @@ -10979,9 +11225,27 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% } % \end{macrocode} % +% \subsubsection{Audiovisual materials} +% +% For audiovisual materials, |origdatetype| defaults to ‘recorded’. +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \map[overwrite=false]{ + \pertype{audio} + \pertype{music} + \pertype{movie} + \pertype{video} + \pertype{inaudio} + \pertype{inmusic} + \pertype{inmovie} + \pertype{invideo} + \step[fieldset=origdatetype,fieldvalue={recorded}] + } +% \end{macrocode} +% % \subsubsection{Legal references} % -% These help ensure compatibility with \textsf{oscola}. +% These help ensure compatibility with \pkg{oscola}. % % \begin{macrocode} \map[overwrite=false]{ @@ -11143,7 +11407,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % end up at the front (library, collection, series). % % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareSortingScheme{nty}{ +\DeclareSortingTemplate{nty}{ \sort{ \field{presort} } @@ -11180,10 +11444,50 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% } } -\DeclareSortingScheme{nyt}{ +\DeclareSortingTemplate{nyt}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + \sort[final]{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + \field{library} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + \sort{ + \field{location} + } + \sort{ + \field{collection} + \field{series} + } +} + +\DeclareSortingTemplate{anyt}{ \sort{ \field{presort} } + \sort{ + \field{labelalpha} + } \sort[final]{ \field{sortkey} } @@ -11237,7 +11541,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \subsection{Preliminaries} % -% First we load the common \textsf{oxref} features. +% First we load the common \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} features. % % \begin{macrocode} \RequireBibliographyStyle{oxref} @@ -11318,6 +11622,103 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %</n> +%<*m> +% \fi %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \section{Numeric style: oxnum.bbx} +% +% \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19} +% +% \subsection{Preliminaries} +% +% First we load the common \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} features. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequireBibliographyStyle{oxref} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We apply our special name format to names likely to appear at the start of +% an entry. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareNameAlias{author}{bib-family-given/cite-given-family} +\DeclareNameAlias[related:reviewof]{author}{given-family} +\DeclareNameAlias{editor}{bib-family-given/cite-given-family} +\DeclareNameAlias[related:reviewof]{editor}{given-family} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We ensure the printing of the |anon| localization string matches. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\xpatchbibmacro{author}{% + \iftoggle{blx@ox@abbranon}{\bibcpsstring{anon}}{\bibcplstring{anon}}% +}{% + \iftoggle{blx@ox@abbranon}{% + \iftoggle{blx@ox@scnames}{\bibcpsstring[\textsc]{anon}}{\bibcpsstring{anon}}% + }{% + \iftoggle{blx@ox@scnames}{\bibcplstring[\textsc]{anon}}{\bibcplstring{anon}}% + }% +}{}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Label numbers} +% +% This next code is extracted from the standard |numeric| style. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{labelnumber} + +\providebool{bbx:subentry} + +\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{subentry}[true]{% + \setbool{bbx:subentry}{#1}} + +\DeclareFieldFormat{bibentrysetcount}{\mkbibparens{\mknumalph{#1}}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} + +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} + {\list + {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelnumber}}} + {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}} + {\endlist} + {\item} + +\defbibenvironment{shorthand} + {\list + {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}} + {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\shorthandwidth}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}}} + {\endlist} + {\item} + +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{set}{% + \entryset + {\ifbool{bbx:subentry} + {\printfield[bibentrysetcount]{entrysetcount}% + \printunit*{\addnbspace}} + {}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{setpageref}% + \finentry} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%</m> %<*y> % \fi %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % @@ -11327,7 +11728,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \subsection{Preliminaries} % -% First we load the common \textsf{oxref} features. +% First we load the common \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} features. % % \begin{macrocode} \RequireBibliographyStyle{oxref} @@ -11337,15 +11738,20 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % can still override them. % % \begin{macrocode} -\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{uniquename=init,giveninits,labeldateparts,sorting=nyt,pagetracker,maxcitenames=2} +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{giveninits,labeldateparts,sorting=nyt,pagetracker,maxcitenames=2} % \end{macrocode} % % \subsection{Date merging option} % -% We provide the |mergedate| option from the |authoryear| style. The OGS and -% NHR consistently use a variant that is between basic and compact, in that the -% year is always moved but the month and day are never moved; this is -% implemented as the |year| value. +% We provide the |mergedate| option from the |authoryear| style. In case it +% isn't clear from the standard documentation, the purpose of this option is +% twofold: it determines whether the date printed at the head of the reference +% is the same as or different from |labeldate| as used in the citations, and +% to what extent the date information at the head of the reference is repeated +% later on. The OGS and NHR consistently use a variant that is between the +% basic and compact options, in that the year is always moved to the head of +% the reference (matching |labeldate|) but the month and day are never moved; +% this is implemented as the |year| value. % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareBibliographyOption{mergedate}[true]{% @@ -11357,32 +11763,56 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% 'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}} % \end{macrocode} % -% The various values affect the definition of the following macro, for -% which we coin the |datelabel| field format. +% The various values affect the definition of the following macro, used at +% the head of the reference, for which we coin the |datelabel| field format. % % \begin{macrocode} -\providebibmacro*{date+extrayear}{} +\providebibmacro*{date+extradate}{} \DeclareFieldFormat{datelabel}{\mkbibparens{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % -% We provide a convenience macro for printing date ranges as the date label. +% On a related note, the |labeldate| uses the |origdate| if provided in +% preference to |date|, and falls back to |pubstate| if provided. % % \begin{macrocode} -\newbibmacro*{labelyearrange}{% - \printfield{labelyear}% - \printfield{extrayear}% - \iffieldundef{labelendyear}{}{% - \iffieldsequal{labelyear}{labelendyear}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{labelendyear}{}{% - \mbox{\bibdaterangesep}% - }{% - \bibdaterangesep - \iffieldundef{extrayear}{% - \blx@ox@compyear - {\thefield{labelyear}}% - {\thefield{labelendyear}}% - }{% - \printfield{labelendyear}}}}}} +\DeclareLabeldate{% + \field{origdate} + \field{date} + \field{year} + \field{eventdate} + \field{pubstate} + \literal{nodate} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The |extradate| string should be printed bare. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareFieldFormat{extradate}{% + \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{% + \iffieldnums{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{}{~}% + }{% + \iffieldnums{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{~}% + }% + \mkbibemph{\mknumalph{#1}}}% + +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We provide tests similar to \cs{labeldateisdate} to tell if the |labeldate| +% is (\emph{a}) any type of date, and (\emph{b}) neither a date nor |pubstate|. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\iflabeldateisanydate{% + \ifboolexpr{% + togl {blx@labeldateparts} + and not test {\iffieldundef{labeldatesource}} + and not test {\iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}}}} +\def\iflabeldateispubstate{% + \ifboolexpr{% + not test {\iffieldundef{labeldatesource}} + and test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}}}} + + % \end{macrocode} % % Here we provide the various possible definitions. The |authoryear| @@ -11410,33 +11840,25 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \begin{macrocode} \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@maximum{% - \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{% \printtext[datelabel]{% - \printfield{issue}% - \setunit*{\addspace}% - \ifboolexpr{% - not test {\iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}} - and - test {\iffieldsequal{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{labelyear}} - }{% - \printlabeldateextra + \iflabeldateisdate{% + \printfield{issue}\clearfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + \printdateextra + \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}% }{% - \printfield{labelyear}% - \printfield{extrayear}}}% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}{}{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}% - }{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}month}% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}day}% - }% - \clearfield{issue}}}}% + \iflabeldateisanydate{% + \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}% + }{% + \printlabeldateextra + \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}% + }}}}}}% % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{itemize} @@ -11447,30 +11869,19 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \begin{macrocode} \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact{% - \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{% \printtext[datelabel]{% - \ifboolexpr{% - not test {\iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}} - and - test {\iffieldsequal{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{labelyear}} + \iflabeldateisanydate{% + \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}% }{% \printlabeldateextra - }{% - \printfield{labelyear}% - \printfield{extrayear}}}% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}{}{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}% - }{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}month}% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}day}% - }}}} + \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}% + }}}}}% % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{itemize} @@ -11482,18 +11893,14 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \begin{macrocode} \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@year{% - \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{% - \printtext[datelabel]{% - \usebibmacro{labelyearrange}}% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}{}{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}% - }{% + \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}% + \iflabeldateisanydate{% \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - }}}} + }{% + \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}% + }}}}% % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{itemize} @@ -11505,57 +11912,49 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \begin{macrocode} \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@basic{% - \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{% - \printtext[datelabel]{% - \usebibmacro{labelyearrange}}% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}{}{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}% + \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}% + \iflabeldateisanydate{% + \ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{}} + and + not test {\iffieldundef{issue}} + }{}{% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}}}% }{% - \ifboolexpr{ - test {\iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}} - and ( - test {\iffieldundef{issue}} - or - not test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{}} - )}{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - }{}}}}}% + \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}% + }}}} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{itemize} % \item |minimum| will only merge the |date| with the label date if the two % are identical, that is, a bare year with no month or disambiguating suffix. % Therefore we clear the year if and only if there is no month component, no -% |extrayear|, \emph{and} (if this is the regular |date|) no |issue|. +% |extradate|, \emph{and} (if this is the regular |date|) no |issue|. % \end{itemize} % % \begin{macrocode} \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@minimum{% - \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{% - \printtext[datelabel]{% - \usebibmacro{labelyearrange}}% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}{}{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}% - }{% + \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}% + \iflabeldateisanydate{% \ifboolexpr{ - test {\iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}} - and - test {\iffieldundef{extrayear}} - and ( - test {\iffieldundef{issue}} - or - not test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{}} - )}{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - \clearfield{end\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% - }{}}}}}% + test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{\thefield{labeldatesource}}} + or + not test {\iffieldundef{extradate}} + }{}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{}} + and + not test {\iffieldundef{issue}} + }{}{% + \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}}}% + }{% + \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}% + }}}} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{itemize} @@ -11565,14 +11964,12 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \begin{macrocode} \def\bbx@opt@mergedate@false{% - \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% \iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{% - \printtext[datelabel]{% - \usebibmacro{labelyearrange}}}}% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}{}{% - \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}{}} + \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}% + \iflabeldateisanydate{}{% + \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}% + }}}} % \end{macrocode} % % We set the default to be |true|/|year|. @@ -11581,152 +11978,57 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{mergedate} % \end{macrocode} % -% The \cs{clearfield} commands in the |year| option code would suppress any -% further date information being printed, but we need to allow months and days -% to be printed in the absence of a year. This means adapting the range -% calculation commands defined in |biblatex.sty| for use by -% \cs{printdate} and friends. +% The problem with moving years but leaving months and days behind is that the +% regular date range macros in |biblatex.sty| do nothing at all if no year +% is printed. We therefore need to patch the macros with extra routines for +% printing year-free date ranges: the rather extravagently named +% \cs{mknoyeardaterangefull} and \cs{mknoyeardaterangetrunc}. % % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mkdaterangefull}[2]{% - \blx@metadateinfo{#2}% - \iffieldundef{#2year}{% - \iffieldundef{#2month}{}{% - \datecircaprint - \printtext[#2date]{% - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2month}{#2day}% - \blx@printtime{#2}{}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2season}}% - \dateuncertainprint - \iffieldundef{#2endmonth}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{#2endmonth}{}{% - \mbox{\bibdaterangesep}% - }{% - \bibdaterangesep - \enddatecircaprint - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% - \blx@printtime{#2}{end}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2endseason}}% - \enddateuncertainprint}}}}% - }{% +\newrobustcmd*{\mknoyeardaterangefull}[2]{% + \iffieldundef{#2month}{}{% \datecircaprint \printtext[#2date]{% - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2year}{#2month}{#2day}% - \blx@printtime{#2}{}% + \iffieldundef{#2season}{% + \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2month}{#2day}% + \blx@printtime{#2}{}% + }{% + \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2season}}% + \dateuncertainprint + \iffieldundef{#2endmonth}{}{% + \iffieldequalstr{#2endmonth}{}{% + \mbox{\bibdaterangesep}% }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{#2year}{#2season}}% - \dateuncertainprint - \dateeraprint{#2year}% - \iffieldundef{#2endyear}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{#2endyear}{}{% - \mbox{\bibdaterangesep}% + \bibdaterangesep + \enddatecircaprint + \iffieldundef{#2season}{% + \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% + \blx@printtime{#2}{end}% }{% - \bibdaterangesep - \enddatecircaprint - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% - \blx@printtime{#2}{end}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endseason}}% - \enddateuncertainprint - \dateeraprint{#2endyear}}}}}} - + \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2endseason}}% + \enddateuncertainprint}}}}} % \end{macrocode} % -% There is a potential problem for the code below, in that if the year -% and endyear are missing, it cannot tell if they are the same, so if -% the months are the same but the years are different, the range would +% There is a potential problem for \cs{mknoyeardaterangetrunc}, in that if +% the year and endyear are missing, it cannot tell if they are the same, so +% if the months are the same but the years are different, the range would % be erroneously compressed. However, the only reason the year should % be missing is that it is in the label, so we test |labelyear| instead. % % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mkdaterangetrunc}[2]{% - \blx@metadateinfo{#2}% - \iffieldundef{#2year}{% - \iffieldundef{#2month}{}{% - \datecircaprint - \printtext[#2date]{% - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \ifboolexpr{ - test {\iffieldsequal{labelyear}{labelendyear}} - and - test {\iffieldsequal{#2month}{#2endmonth}} - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{}{#2day}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2month}{#2day}}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2season}}% - \dateuncertainprint - \iffieldundef{#2endmonth}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{#2endmonth}{}{% - \mbox{\bibdaterangesep}% - }{% - \bibdaterangesep - \enddatecircaprint - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2endseason}}% - \enddateuncertainprint}}}}% - }{% +\newrobustcmd*{\mknoyeardaterangetrunc}[2]{% + \iffieldundef{#2month}{}{% \datecircaprint \printtext[#2date]{% \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \iffieldsequal{#2year}{#2endyear}{% - \iffieldsequal{#2month}{#2endmonth}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{}{#2day}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2month}{#2day}}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2year}{#2month}{#2day}% - \iffieldsequal{#2dateera}{#2enddateera}{}{% - \dateeraprint{#2year}}}% - }{% - \iffieldsequal{#2year}{#2endyear}{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2season}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldsequal{labelyear}{labelendyear}} + and + test {\iffieldsequal{#2month}{#2endmonth}} }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{#2year}{#2season}% - \iffieldsequal{#2dateera}{#2enddateera}{}{% - \dateeraprint{#2year}}}}% - \dateuncertainprint - \iffieldundef{#2endyear}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{#2endyear}{}{% - \mbox{\bibdaterangesep}% + \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{}{#2day}% }{% - \bibdaterangesep - \enddatecircaprint - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \iffieldundef{#2endmonth}{% - \blx@ox@compyear{\thefield{#2year}}{\thefield{#2endyear}}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endseason}}% - \enddateuncertainprint - \dateeraprint{#2endyear}}}}}} - -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The |extra| commands, which print disambiguating labels, should only -% print those labels if the year is present, so the first conditional -% block is the same as for the non-|extra| commands above. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mkdaterangefullextra}[2]{% - \blx@metadateinfo{#2}% - \iffieldundef{#2year}{% - \iffieldundef{#2month}{}{% - \datecircaprint - \printtext[#2date]{% - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2month}{#2day}% - \blx@printtime{#2}{}% + \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2month}{#2day}}% }{% \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2season}}% \dateuncertainprint @@ -11738,132 +12040,37 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \enddatecircaprint \iffieldundef{#2season}{% \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% - \blx@printtime{#2}{end}% }{% \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2endseason}}% - \enddateuncertainprint}}}}% - }{% - \datecircaprint - \printtext[#2date]{% - \printtext{% - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2year}{#2month}{#2day}% - \blx@printtime{#2}{}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{#2year}{#2season}}% - \dateuncertainprint - \dateeraprint{#2year}% - \iffieldundef{#2endyear}{% - \printfield{extrayear}% - }{% - \iffieldequalstr{#2endyear}{}{% - \printfield{extrayear}% - \printtext{\mbox{\bibdaterangesep}}% - }{% - \printtext{% - \bibdaterangesep - \enddatecircaprint - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% - \blx@printtime{#2}{end}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endseason}}}% - \printfield{extrayear}% - \enddateuncertainprint - \dateeraprint{#2endyear}}}}}}} - -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\mkdaterangetruncextra}[2]{% - \blx@metadateinfo{#2}% - \iffieldundef{#2year}{% - \iffieldundef{#2month}{}{% - \datecircaprint - \printtext[#2date]{% - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \iffieldsequal{#2month}{#2endmonth}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{}{#2day}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2month}{#2day}}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2season}}% - \dateuncertainprint - \iffieldundef{#2endmonth}{}{% - \iffieldequalstr{#2endmonth}{}{% - \mbox{\bibdaterangesep}% - }{% - \bibdaterangesep - \enddatecircaprint - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2endseason}}% - \enddateuncertainprint}}}}% - }{% - \datecircaprint - \printtext[#2date]{% - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \iffieldsequal{#2year}{#2endyear}{% - \iffieldsequal{#2month}{#2endmonth}{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{}{#2day}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{}{#2month}{#2day}}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2year}{#2month}{#2day}% - \iffieldsequal{#2dateera}{#2enddateera}{}{% - \dateeraprint{#2year}}}% - }{% - \iffieldsequal{#2year}{#2endyear}{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{}{#2season}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{#2year}{#2season} - \iffieldsequal{#2dateera}{#2enddateera}{}{% - \dateeraprint{#2year}}}}% - \dateuncertainprint - \iffieldundef{#2endyear}{% - \printfield{extrayear}% - }{% - \iffieldequalstr{#2endyear}{}{% - \printfield{extrayear}% - \printtext{\mbox{\bibdaterangesep}}% - }{% - \printtext{% - \bibdaterangesep - \enddatecircaprint - \iffieldundef{#2season}{% - \iffieldundef{#2endmonth}{% - \blx@ox@compyear{\thefield{#2year}}{\thefield{#2endyear}}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibdate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endmonth}{#2endday}}% - }{% - \csuse{mkbibseasondate#1}{#2endyear}{#2endseason}}}% - \printfield{extrayear}% - \enddateuncertainprint - \dateeraprint{#2endyear}}}}}} - + \enddateuncertainprint}}}}} % \end{macrocode} % -% The |labelyear| falls back to |pubstate| if provided. +% Now we patch the four date range commands. The |extra| commands, +% which print disambiguating labels as well, should only print those +% labels if the year is present, so they can use the same non-year +% date range functions as the non-|extra| commands. % % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareLabeldate{% - \field{origdate} - \field{date} - \field{year} - \field{eventdate} - \field{pubstate} - \literal{nodate} -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The |extrayear| string should be printed bare. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareFieldFormat{extrayear}{% - \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{% - \iffieldnums{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}{}{~}% - }{% - \iffieldnums{\thefield{labeldatesource}}{}{~}% - }% - \mkbibemph{\mknumalph{#1}}}% +\xpatchcmd{\mkdaterangefull}{% + \iffieldundef{#2year} {}% +}{% + \iffieldundef{#2year} {\mknoyeardaterangefull{#1}{#2}}% +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\mkdaterangetrunc}{% + \iffieldundef{#2year} {}% +}{% + \iffieldundef{#2year} {\mknoyeardaterangetrunc{#1}{#2}}% +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\mkdaterangefullextra}{% + \iffieldundef{#2year} {}% +}{% + \iffieldundef{#2year} {\mknoyeardaterangefull{#1}{#2}}% +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\mkdaterangetruncextra}{% + \iffieldundef{#2year} {}% +}{% + \iffieldundef{#2year} {\mknoyeardaterangetrunc{#1}{#2}}% +}{}{} % \end{macrocode} % @@ -11974,7 +12181,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \xpatchbibmacro{author}{% \iffieldundef{authortype}% }{% - \usebibmacro{date+extrayear}% + \usebibmacro{date+extradate}% \setunit*{\addspace}% \iffieldundef{authortype}% }{}{}% @@ -11984,7 +12191,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \global\undef\bbx@lasthash \usebibmacro{labeltitle}% \setunit*{\addspace}% - \usebibmacro{date+extrayear}% + \usebibmacro{date+extradate}% }{}{}% % \end{macrocode} % @@ -12021,7 +12228,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \xpatchbibmacro{bbx:editor}{% \usebibmacro{#1}% }{% - \usebibmacro{date+extrayear}% + \usebibmacro{date+extradate}% \setunit*{\addspace}% \usebibmacro{#1}% }{}{}% @@ -12031,7 +12238,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \global\undef\bbx@lasthash \usebibmacro{labeltitle}% \setunit*{\addspace}% - \usebibmacro{date+extrayear}% + \usebibmacro{date+extradate}% }{}{}% \xpatchbibmacro{editor+alteditor}{% \printnames[byeditor]% @@ -12063,12 +12270,12 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \global\undef\bbx@lasthash \usebibmacro{labeltitle}% \setunit*{\addspace}% - \usebibmacro{date+extrayear}% + \usebibmacro{date+extradate}% }{}{}% \xpatchbibmacro{bbx:translator}{% \usebibmacro{#1}% }{% - \usebibmacro{date+extrayear}% + \usebibmacro{date+extradate}% \setunit*{\addspace}% \usebibmacro{#1}% }{}{}% @@ -12131,7 +12338,11 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \xpatchbibdriver{online}{% \iffieldundef{year}% }{% - \iffieldundef{month}% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldundef{season}} + and + test {\iffieldundef{month}} + }% }{}{} % \end{macrocode} % @@ -12202,6 +12413,154 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %</y> +%<*a> +% \fi %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \section{Alphabetic style: oxalph.bbx} +% +% \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19} +% +% \subsection{Preliminaries} +% +% This style is based on |oxyear|. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequireBibliographyStyle{oxyear} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Suppressing labelextra} +% +% Since the label codes do all the disambiguation, it is not necessary for +% the date at the head of the reference to have a disambiguation component. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@maximum}{% + \printdateextra +}{% + \printdate +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@maximum}{% + \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra} +}{% + \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date} +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@maximum}{% + \printlabeldateextra +}{% + \printlabeldate +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact}{% + \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra} +}{% + \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date} +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact}{% + \printlabeldateextra +}{% + \printlabeldate +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@year}{% + \printlabeldateextra +}{% + \printlabeldate +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@basic}{% + \printlabeldateextra +}{% + \printlabeldate +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@minimum}{% + \printlabeldateextra +}{% + \printlabeldate +}{}{} +\xpatchcmd{\bbx@opt@mergedate@false}{% + \printlabeldateextra +}{% + \printlabeldate +}{}{} +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{mergedate} + +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Label codes: printing} +% +% This next code is extracted from the standard |alphabetic| style, and among +% other things ensures the citation labels are printed in the bibliography. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{labelalpha,sorting=anyt} + +\DeclareFieldFormat{labelalphawidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} + +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} + {\list + {\printtext[labelalphawidth]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelalpha}% + \printfield{extraalpha}}} + {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelalphawidth}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}} + {\endlist} + {\item} + +\defbibenvironment{shorthand} + {\list + {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}} + {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\shorthandwidth}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}} + {\endlist} + {\item} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Label codes: generating} +% +% The standard labels are generated from the |labelname| and |year|. We widen +% the net a bit, so that if there is no |labelname|, we fall back to the +% |shortlabeltitle| or |labeltitle|; also we use |labelyear| in place of +% |year|. The |shortlabeltitle| is generated from all the capital letters in +% the title and subtitle, with the help of a source map. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareStyleSourcemap{% + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{% + \map[overwrite=false]{% + \step[fieldsource=title, final] + \step[fieldset=shortlabeltitle, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=subtitle] + \step[fieldset=shortlabeltitle, origfieldval, append=true] + \step[fieldsource=shortlabeltitle, + match=\regexp{[^\p{Lu}]}, + replace=\regexp{}] +}}} +\DeclareLabelalphaTemplate{% + \labelelement{ + \field[final]{shorthand} + \field{label} + \field[strwidth=3,strside=left,ifnames=1]{labelname} + \field[strwidth=1,strside=left]{labelname} + \field[strwidth=3,strside=left]{shortlabeltitle} + \field[strwidth=4,strside=left]{labeltitle} + } + \labelelement{ + \field[strwidth=2,strside=right]{labelyear} + } +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%</a> %</bbx> %<*cbx> % \fi %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -12234,14 +12593,27 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19} % % The standard |authoryear-comp| style is a close match for what we need. -% We patch it with our version of year range compression. % % \begin{macrocode} \RequireCitationStyle{authoryear-comp} -\xpatchbibmacro{cite:labelyear+extrayear}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This sets \key{uniquename} to \val{full}, but that conflicts with +% \key{giveninits} set by the bibliography style, so we set it to \val{init} +% instead. If left alone, \pkg{biblatex} would do this anyway, but if we do it +% explicitly, we avoid the warning message. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{uniquename=init} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We patch it with our version of year range compression. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\xpatchbibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}{% \printfield{labelendyear}% }{% - \iffieldundef{extrayear}{% + \iffieldundef{extradate}{% \blx@ox@compyear {\thefield{labelyear}}% {\thefield{labelendyear}}% @@ -12275,11 +12647,11 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % a comma. % % \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand*{\nameyeardelim}{% +\DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{% \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% {\addcomma\space}% {\addspace}} -\renewcommand*{\nonameyeardelim}{% +\DeclareDelimFormat{nonameyeardelim}{% \iffieldundef{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}% {\addcomma\space}% {\addspace}} @@ -12300,13 +12672,99 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %</y> +%<*m> +% \fi %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \section{Notes style: oxnum.cbx} +% +% \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19} +% +% The standard |numeric| style works without further adjustment. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Compressed citations are delimited with a semicolon, just like +% non-compressed citations. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The page reference postnote is given after a colon. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand*{\postnotedelim}{\addcolon\space} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%</m> +%<*a> +% \fi %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \section{Notes style: oxalph.cbx} +% +% \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19} +% +% The standard |alphabetic| style works without further adjustment. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequireCitationStyle{alphabetic} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Compressed citations are delimited with a semicolon, just like +% non-compressed citations. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The page reference postnote is given after a colon. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand*{\postnotedelim}{\addcolon\space} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%</a> +% \fi %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% +% \section{Common citation fixes} +% +% \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{0} +% +% This code is appended to all the citation style files. +% +% We fix the |textcite| macro so if the \key{anon} option is set to \val{long} +% or \val{short}, a value of ‘Anonymous’ is replaced by the bibstring. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{% + \printnames{labelname}% +}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}} + and + togl {blx@ox@autoanon} + and + test {\iffieldequals{rawauthor}{\oxrefanon}} + }{% + \iftoggle{blx@ox@abbranon}{\bibcpsstring{anon}}{\bibcplstring{anon}}% + }{% + \printnames{labelname}% + }% +}{}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %</cbx> %<*dbx> % \fi %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % % \chapter{Data model adjustments} % -% \section{oxnotes.dbx and oxyear.dbx} +% \section{oxnotes.dbx, oxyear.dbx, oxnum.dbx, and oxalph.dbx} % % \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19} % @@ -12348,6 +12806,13 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% serieseditor,jointauthor,jointauthortype,rawauthor} % \end{macrocode} % +% We provide a |shortlabeltitle| field to contain our custom reduction of the +% |labeltitle|. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortlabeltitle} +% \end{macrocode} +% % This data model is borrowed from \textsf{biblatex-manuscripts-philology}. % % \begin{macrocode} @@ -12358,7 +12823,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=list,datatype=name]{scribe,owner} \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=list,datatype=literal]{origin} \DeclareDatamodelEntryfields[manuscript]{catalog,dating,shortlibrary,% - shortcollection,columns,languages, collection,usualtitle,shelfmark,% + shortcollection,columns,languages,collection,usualtitle,shelfmark,% sortshelfmark,support,columns,origin,scribe,owner} % \end{macrocode} % @@ -12410,7 +12875,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% inherit = {english}, % \end{macrocode} % -% These are new strings defined by \textsf{oxref}: +% These are new strings defined by \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}: % % \begin{itemize} % \item Roles expressed as functions @@ -12482,6 +12947,26 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% regulations = {{regulations}{regs\adddot}}, rule = {{rule}{r\adddot}}, rules = {{rules}{rr\adddot}}, + booktotal = {{book}{bk\adddot}}, + booktotals = {{books}{bks\adddot}}, + cantototal = {{canto}{canto}}, + cantototals = {{cantos}{cantos}}, + stanzatotal = {{stanza}{stanza}}, + stanzatotals = {{stanzas}{stanzas}}, + acttotal = {{Act}{Act}}, + acttotals = {{Acts}{Acts}}, + scenetotal = {{Scene}{Scene}}, + scenetotals = {{Scenes}{Scenes}}, + foliototal = {{folio}{fo\adddot}}, + foliototals = {{folios}{fos\adddot}}, + articletotal = {{article}{art\adddot}}, + articletotals = {{articles}{arts\adddot}}, + clausetotal = {{clause}{cl\adddot}}, + clausetotals = {{clauses}{cls\adddot}}, + regulationtotal = {{regulation}{reg\adddot}}, + regulationtotals = {{regulations}{regs\adddot}}, + ruletotal = {{rule}{r\adddot}}, + ruletotals = {{rules}{rr\adddot}}, % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{itemize} @@ -12503,6 +12988,7 @@ reference,mvreference,inreference]{volume}{% % % \begin{macrocode} nolocation = {{no place}{n\adddot p\adddot}}, + modified = {{last modified}{last modified}}, recorded = {{recorded}{recorded}}, uploaded = {{uploaded}{uploaded}}, % \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.ins index d5cbd9cca53..e8948fd99c5 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.ins +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.ins @@ -44,15 +44,23 @@ Copyright (C) 2016 Alex Ball \generate{ \file{\jobname.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,o}} \file{oxnotes.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,n}} + \file{oxnum.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,m}} + \file{oxalph.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,a}} \file{oxyear.bbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{bbx,y}} \file{oxnotes.cbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{cbx,n}} + \file{oxnum.cbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{cbx,m}} + \file{oxalph.cbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{cbx,a}} \file{oxyear.cbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{cbx,y}} \file{oxnotes.dbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{dbx,n}} + \file{oxnum.dbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{dbx,m}} + \file{oxalph.dbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{dbx,a}} \file{oxyear.dbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{dbx,y}} \file{american-\jobname.lbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{lbx,us}} \file{british-\jobname.lbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{lbx,gb}} \file{english-\jobname.lbx}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{lbx,en}} \file{oxnotes-doc.tex}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{doc,n}} + \file{oxnum-doc.tex}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{doc,m}} + \file{oxalph-doc.tex}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{doc,a}} \file{oxyear-doc.tex}{\from{\jobname.dtx}{doc,y}} } \endbatchfile |